INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation...
Transcript of INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK · 2704 Controller Contents Installation and Operation...
2704 Controller Contents
Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-1
MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER
INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK
1. CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION .................................................................................. 1.2
1.1. ABOUT THIS MANUAL....................................................................................... 1.2
1.1.1. The Structure Of This Manual ............................................................................... 1.2
1.2. WHAT IS 2704........................................................................................................ 1.3
1.3. BEFORE YOU BEGIN .......................................................................................... 1.4
1.3.1. Unpacking.............................................................................................................. 1.4
1.3.2. Contents of Packaging ........................................................................................... 1.4
1.3.3. Does the Controller Match the Process?................................................................ 1.4
1.4. OPERATOR INTERFACE - OVERVIEW.......................................................... 1.6
1.4.1. Status Messages..................................................................................................... 1.7
1.5. INSTALLATION - OVERVIEW .......................................................................... 1.8
1.6. I/O MODULES ....................................................................................................... 1.9
2. CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION.................................................................................... 2.2
2.1. MECHANICAL INSTALLATION....................................................................... 2.2
2.1.1. Positioning.............................................................................................................2.2
2.1.2. Outline dimensions Model 2704............................................................................ 2.2
2.1.3. Mounting the Controller ........................................................................................ 2.3
2.1.4. Unplugging and Plugging in the Controller........................................................... 2.3
2.2. WIRING .................................................................................................................. 2.4
2.2.1. Electrical Connections........................................................................................... 2.4
2.2.2. Rear Terminal Layout ............................................................................................ 2.4
2.3. STANDARD CONNECTIONS.............................................................................. 2.6
2.3.1. Power Supply Wiring (Line voltage) ..................................................................... 2.6
2.3.2. Relay Output.......................................................................................................... 2.6
2.3.3. Sensor Input Connections...................................................................................... 2.7
2.3.4. Analogue Input Connections ................................................................................. 2.8
2.3.5. I/O Expander (or Additional Digital Input) ........................................................... 2.9
2.3.6. Digital I/O............................................................................................................ 2.10
2.4. OPTIONAL PLUG IN MODULE CONNECTIONS ........................................ 2.11
2.4.1. Digital Communications Connections ................................................................. 2.11
Contents 2704 Controller
a-2 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00
2.4.2. I/O Modules......................................................................................................... 2.13
2.5. TO CONNECT ZIRCONIA (DUAL SIGNAL) PROBE................................... 2.18
2.5.1. Zirconia Probe Screening .................................................................................... 2.19
3. CHAPTER 3 GETTING STARTED............................................................................. 3.2
3.1. POWER UP............................................................................................................. 3.3
3.1.1. The HOME Page ................................................................................................... 3.3
3.2. THE OPERATOR BUTTONS .............................................................................. 3.4
3.3. THE PROG BUTTON............................................................................................ 3.5
3.4. THE LOOP SELECT BUTTON ........................................................................... 3.5
3.5. THE AUTO MANUAL BUTTON......................................................................... 3.6
3.5.1. To Change Setpoint (when the loop is in Auto) .................................................... 3.7
3.5.2. To Change Output Power (when the loop is in Manual) ....................................... 3.7
3.6. PARAMETERS AND HOW TO ACCESS THEM ............................................. 3.8
3.6.1. Pages...................................................................................................................... 3.8
3.7. NAVIGATION OVERVIEW................................................................................. 3.9
3.7.1. To Select a Page Header ........................................................................................ 3.9
3.7.2. To Navigate to a Parameter from a Page Header. ................................................ 3.10
3.7.3. To Change Next Parameter in the List................................................................. 3.11
3.7.4. To Change Any Parameter in the List.................................................................. 3.11
3.8. BACKSCROLL .................................................................................................... 3.11
3.9. PARAMETER VALUES ..................................................................................... 3.12
3.9.1. Confirmation Mechanism .................................................................................... 3.13
3.9.2. Invalid key actions............................................................................................... 3.13
3.10. PARAMETER TABLES.................................................................................... 3.14
3.11. DISPLAYS FOR CASCADE, RATIO AND OVERRIDE .............................. 3.15
3.12. PARAMETER AVAILABILITY AND ALTERABILITY ............................. 3.18
4. CHAPTER 4 ACCESS LEVELS.................................................................................. 4.2
4.1. THE DIFFERENT ACCESS LEVELS................................................................. 4.2
4.2. PASSCODES........................................................................................................... 4.2
4.3. TO SELECT AN ACCESS LEVEL ...................................................................... 4.3
2704 Controller Contents
Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-3
5. CHAPTER 5 THE SUMMARY PAGE ....................................................................... 5.2
5.1. WHAT IS THE SUMMARY PAGE ..................................................................... 5.2
5.1.1. To Select The Summary Page................................................................................ 5.2
6. CHAPTER 6 PROGRAMMER OPERATION........................................................... 6.2
6.1.1. Customisable Parameter Names............................................................................. 6.2
6.2. WHAT IS SETPOINT PROGRAMMING ?........................................................ 6.3
6.3. THE 2704 SETPOINT PROGRAMMER DEFINITIONS ................................. 6.4
6.3.1. Run ........................................................................................................................ 6.4
6.3.2. Hold....................................................................................................................... 6.4
6.3.3. Reset ...................................................................................................................... 6.4
6.3.4. Servo...................................................................................................................... 6.4
6.3.5. Hot Start ................................................................................................................ 6.4
6.3.6. Power Fail Recovery.............................................................................................. 6.5
6.3.7. Wait ....................................................................................................................... 6.6
6.3.8. Holdback (Guaranteed Soak)................................................................................. 6.7
6.3.9. Digital Inputs......................................................................................................... 6.8
6.3.10. Program User Values........................................................................................... 6.8
6.4. PROGRAMMER TYPES...................................................................................... 6.9
6.4.1. Time To Target Programmer ................................................................................. 6.9
6.4.2.Ramp Rate Programmer.......................................................................................... 6.9
6.4.3. Segment Types....................................................................................................... 6.9
6.5. PROGRAMMER PAGES.................................................................................... 6.11
6.5.1. To Access the Program Trend Screen.................................................................. 6.11
6.5.2. Parameters Available on the Programmer Mimic Screen .................................... 6.12
6.6. TO RUN, HOLD OR RESET A PROGRAM..................................................... 6.13
6.6.1. From the ‘PROG’ Button .................................................................................... 6.13
6.6.2. From Digital Inputs ............................................................................................. 6.13
6.6.3. From Digital Communications ............................................................................ 6.13
6.6.4. From the Programmer Run Parameters Page ....................................................... 6.14
6.6.5. Run Parameter Tables.......................................................................................... 6.15
6.7. TO CREATE OR EDIT A PROGRAM.............................................................. 6.17
6.7.1. To Access the Program Edit pages ...................................................................... 6.17
6.7.2. PROGRAM EDIT (Program Page) Parameters ................................................... 6.18
Contents 2704 Controller
a-4 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00
6.7.3. To Set Up Each Segment of a Program ............................................................... 6.20
6.7.4. PROGRAM EDIT (Segment) Parameters............................................................ 6.21
6.8. EXAMPLES.......................................................................................................... 6.24
6.8.1. To Enter a Program in a Ramp Rate Programmer................................................ 6.24
6.8.2. To Enter a Program in a Time to Target Programmer.......................................... 6.28
6.8.3. To Apply Holdback ............................................................................................. 6.29
6.8.4. To Apply Wait ..................................................................................................... 6.31
6.8.5. To Display Wait Status in Run Mode.................................................................. 6.32
6.8.6. To Set Up Program Names .................................................................................. 6.33
6.8.7. To Set Up Segment Names .................................................................................. 6.34
6A. CHAPTER 6A DIGITAL PROGRAMMER ............................................................ 6.2
6A.1. WHAT IS THE DIGITAL PROGRAMMER? ................................................. 6.2
6A.1.1. To Edit The Digital Programmer ........................................................................ 6.3
6A.1.2. Digital Program Edit Page .................................................................................. 6.4
6A.1.3. To Run The Digital Programmer From The Run List ......................................... 6.5
6A.1.4. Digital Program 1 to 4 Page................................................................................ 6.6
6A.2. POWER FAIL RECOVERY .............................................................................. 6.6
2704 Controller Contents
Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-5
7. CHAPTER 7 ALARM OPERATION .......................................................................... 7.2
7.1. DEFINITION OF ALARMS AND EVENTS ....................................................... 7.2
7.1.1. Customisable Parameter Names............................................................................. 7.2
7.2. TYPES OF ALARM USED IN 2704 CONTROLLER........................................ 7.3
7.2.1. Full Scale High ...................................................................................................... 7.3
7.2.2. Full Scale Low....................................................................................................... 7.3
7.2.3. Deviation High Alarm ........................................................................................... 7.4
7.2.4. Deviation Low Alarm ............................................................................................ 7.4
7.2.5. Deviation Band...................................................................................................... 7.5
7.2.6. Rate Of Change Alarm (Negative Direction)......................................................... 7.6
7.2.7. Rate Of Change Alarm (Positive Direction) .......................................................... 7.6
7.3. BLOCKING ALARMS.......................................................................................... 7.7
7.3.1. Full Scale Low With Blocking .............................................................................. 7.7
7.3.2. Full Scale High Alarm With Blocking................................................................... 7.7
7.3.3. Deviation Band With Blocking.............................................................................. 7.8
7.4. LATCHING ALARMS .......................................................................................... 7.9
7.4.1. Latched Alarm (Full Scale High) With Automatic Reset....................................... 7.9
7.4.2. Latched Alarm (Full Scale High) With Manual Reset ......................................... 7.10
7.4.3. Grouped Alarms................................................................................................... 7.10
7.5. HOW ALARMS ARE INDICATED................................................................... 7.11
7.5.1. Alarm Delay Time ............................................................................................... 7.11
7.6. THE ALARM SUMMARY PAGE ..................................................................... 7.12
7.6.1. Alarms (Summary) Parameters ............................................................................ 7.13
7.7. ALARM ACKNOWLEDGEMENT.................................................................... 7.15
7.7.1. To Acknowledge a Latched Alarm ...................................................................... 7.16
7.8. TO SET ALARM TRIP LEVELS AND HYSTERESIS ................................... 7.17
7.9. ALARM PARAMETERS .................................................................................... 7.18
7.9.1. ALARMS (LP1 Page) Parameters ....................................................................... 7.18
7.9.2. ALARMS (PV Input Page) Parameters ............................................................... 7.19
7.9.3. ALARMS (An Input Page) Parameters................................................................ 7.20
7.9.4. ALARMS (Module 1 Page) Parameters .............................................................. 7.21
7.9.5. ALARMS (User 1 Page) Parameters ................................................................... 7.22
Contents 2704 Controller
a-6 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00
8. CHAPTER 8 TUNING ..................................................................................................... 2
8.1. WHAT IS TUNING................................................................................................... 2
8.2. AUTOMATIC TUNING ........................................................................................... 3
8.2.1. One-shot Tuning....................................................................................................... 3
8.3. TO AUTOTUNE CONTOL LOOP LP1.................................................................. 4
8.3.1. AutotuneParameters.................................................................................................. 6
8.3.2. To View the State of Autotune ................................................................................. 7
8.4. MANUAL TUNING .................................................................................................. 8
8.4.1. Setting the cutback values......................................................................................... 9
8.4.2. Integral action and manual reset ............................................................................. 10
8.4.3. To Manually Set PID Values.................................................................................. 10
8.4.4. Valve Position Control ........................................................................................... 10
8.5. CASCADE TUNING ............................................................................................... 10
8.5.1. Manual Tuning ....................................................................................................... 10
8.5.2. Automatic Tuning of a Cascade Loop .................................................................... 10
8.6. GAIN SCHEDULING ............................................................................................. 11
8.6.1. To Use Gain Scheduling......................................................................................... 11
8.6.2. Analogue Value ...................................................................................................... 12
9. CHAPTER 9 LOOP SET UP........................................................................................ 9.2
9.1. WHAT IS LOOP SET UP...................................................................................... 9.2
9.2. TO SET UP PID PARAMETERS......................................................................... 9.3
9.2.1. To Manually Set The PID And Other Tuning Parameters ..................................... 9.4
9.2.2. PID Page................................................................................................................9.5
9.2.3. PID (Aux) Page ..................................................................................................... 9.6
9.3. TO ADJUST SETPOINT PARAMETERS .......................................................... 9.7
9.3.1. LP1 SETUP (SP Aux) Page................................................................................... 9.8
9.4. CASCADE CONTROL.......................................................................................... 9.9
9.4.1. Overview ............................................................................................................... 9.9
9.4.2. Simple Cascade...................................................................................................... 9.9
9.4.3. Cascade with Feedforward..................................................................................... 9.9
9.4.4. Auto/Manual Operation......................................................................................... 9.9
9.4.5. Cascade Parameters LP1 SETUP (Cascade Page) ............................................. 9.10
9.5. RATIO CONTROL .............................................................................................. 9.11
2704 Controller Contents
Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-7
9.5.1. Introduction ......................................................................................................... 9.11
9.5.2. Basic Ratio Control ............................................................................................. 9.11
9.5.3. Setpoint Tracking ................................................................................................ 9.12
9.5.4. Ratio Control Parameters LP1 SETUP (Ratio Page) ......................................... 9.12
9.6. OVERRIDE CONTROL...................................................................................... 9.13
9.6.1. Introduction: ........................................................................................................ 9.13
9.6.2. Simple Override................................................................................................... 9.13
9.6.3. Override Control Parameters LP1 SETUP (Override Page) ............................... 9.14
9.7. CONTROL OF VALVE POSITIONING MOTORS......................................... 9.15
9.7.1. Motor Parameters ................................................................................................ 9.15
9.7.2. Commissioning the Motorised Valve Controller ................................................. 9.16
9.8. OUTPUT PARAMETERS................................................................................... 9.17
9.9. LP 1 SETUP (DIAGNOSTIC PAGE) ................................................................. 9.19
10. CHAPTER 10 CONTROLLER APPLICATIONS ................................................. 10.2
10.1. ZIRCONIA - CARBON POTENTIAL CONTROL ........................................ 10.3
10.1.1. Temperature Control.......................................................................................... 10.3
10.1.2. Carbon Potential Control................................................................................... 10.3
10.1.3. Sooting Alarm.................................................................................................... 10.3
10.1.4. Automatic Probe Cleaning................................................................................. 10.3
10.1.5. Enriching Gas Correction .................................................................................. 10.3
10.1.6. Example Of Carbon Potential Controller Wiring .............................................. 10.4
10.2. TO VIEW AND ADJUST ZIRCONIA PARAMETERS................................. 10.4
10.2.1. Zirconia Parameters........................................................................................... 10.6
10.3. HUMIDITYCONTROL..................................................................................... 10.8
10.3.1. Overview ........................................................................................................... 10.8
10.3.2. Example Of Humidity Controller Wiring .......................................................... 10.9
10.3.3. Temperature Control Of An Environmental Chamber..................................... 10.10
10.3.4. Humidity Control Of An Environmental Chamber.......................................... 10.10
10.1010.4. TO VIEW AND ADJUST HUMIDITY PARAMETERS..................... 10.11
10.4.1. Humidity Parameters ....................................................................................... 10.12
Contents 2704 Controller
a-8 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00
11. CHAPTER 11 INPUT OPERATORS ...................................................................... 11.2
11.1. WHAT ARE INPUT OPERATORS ................................................................. 11.2
11.2. CUSTOM LINEARISATION............................................................................ 11.3
11.2.1. Example: To Linearise Input 1 ......................................................................... 11.4
11.2.2. Input Operator Custom Linearisation Parameters.............................................. 11.6
11.2.3. Compensation for Sensor Discontinuities.......................................................... 11.7
11.3. THERMOCOUPLE/PYROMETER SWITCHING ........................................ 11.8
11.3.1. To Set Up Thermocouple/Pyrometer Switching Points ..................................... 11.9
11.3.2. Input Operators Switch Over Parameters......................................................... 11.10
11.4. TO SET UP INPUT OPERATORS (MONITOR) ......................................... 11.11
11.4.1. Input Operator Monitor Parameters................................................................. 11.11
11.5. BCD INPUT ...................................................................................................... 11.12
12. CHAPTER 12 TOTALISER, TIMER, CLOCK, COUNTER OPERATION....... 12.2
12.1. WHAT ARE TIMER BLOCKS? ...................................................................... 12.2
12.2. TIMER TYPES................................................................................................... 12.4
12.2.1. On Pulse Timer Mode........................................................................................ 12.4
12.2.2. Off Delay Timer Mode ...................................................................................... 12.5
12.2.3. One Shot Timer Mode ....................................................................................... 12.6
12.2.4. Minimum On Timer Mode................................................................................. 12.7
12.3. TIMER BLOCKS............................................................................................... 12.8
12.3.1. Timer Parameters............................................................................................... 12.8
12.4. THE CLOCK ...................................................................................................... 12.9
12.5. TIME BASED ALARMS................................................................................. 12.10
12.5.1. Timer Alarm Parameters.................................................................................. 12.11
12.6. TOTALISERS................................................................................................... 12.12
12.6.1. Totaliser Parameters ........................................................................................ 12.13
2704 Controller Contents
Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-9
13. CHAPTER 13 PATTERN GENERATOR, USER VALUES AND USERMESSAGES........................................................................................................................ 13.2
13.1. WHAT IS THE PATTERN GENERATOR? ................................................... 13.2
13.1.1. To Set Up The Pattern Generator ...................................................................... 13.2
13.2. WHAT ARE USER VALUES?.......................................................................... 13.4
13.2.1. To Adjust User Values...................................................................................... 13..4
13.3. WHAT ARE USER MESSAGES?.................................................................... 13.5
13.3.1. To Inspect User Messages ................................................................................. 13.5
14. CHAPTER 14 ANALOGUE OPERATORS............................................................ 14.2
14.1. WHAT ARE ANALOGUE OPERATORS?..................................................... 14.2
14.1.1. Analogue Operations ......................................................................................... 14.3
14.2. TO VIEW AND ADJUST ANALOGUE OPERATOR PARAMETERS....... 14.4
15. CHAPTER 15 LOGIC OPERATORS ..................................................................... 15.2
15.1.1. Logic Operations ............................................................................................... 15.2
15.2. TO VIEW LOGIC OPERATOR PARAMETERS .......................................... 15.3
16. CHAPTER 16 DIGITAL COMMUNICATIONS ................................................... 16.2
16.1. WHAT IS DIGITAL COMMUNICATIONS?................................................. 16.2
16.2. TO SET COMMUNICATIONS ADDRESS AND RESOLUTION................ 16.3
16.3. COMMUNICATIONS DIAGNOSTICS........................................................... 16.4
Contents 2704 Controller
a-10 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00
17. CHAPTER 17 STANDARD IO ................................................................................ 17.2
17.1. WHAT IS STANDARD IO? .............................................................................. 17.2
17.2. PV INPUT ........................................................................................................... 17.3
17.2.1. To Scale the PV Input........................................................................................ 17.3
17.2.2. Offset .................................................................................................................17.3
17.2.3. To View and Change Input Filter Time............................................................. 17.5
17.2.4. Standard IO PV Input Parameters...................................................................... 17.6
17.3. ANALOGUE INPUT.......................................................................................... 17.7
17.3.1. To Scale the Analogue Input ............................................................................. 17.7
17.3.2. Standard IO Analogue Input Parameters ........................................................... 17.7
17.4. THE FIXED RELAY OUTPUT PARAMETERS ........................................... 17.8
17.5. TO SCALE THE FIXED RELAY OUTPUT ................................................... 17.8
17.5.1. Standard IO AA Relay Parameters .................................................................. 17.10
17.6. STANDARD DIGITAL IO PARAMETERS.................................................. 17.11
17.6.1. Standard IO Digital Input/Output Parameters.................................................. 17.11
17.7. STANDARD IO DIAGNOSTIC PAGE PARAMETERS ............................. 17.12
2704 Controller Contents
Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-11
18. CHAPTER 18 MODULE IO..................................................................................... 18.2
18.1. WHAT IS MODULE IO? .................................................................................. 18.2
18.2. MODULE IDENTIFICATION ......................................................................... 18.3
18.3. MODULE IO PARAMETERS.......................................................................... 18.4
18.3.1. DC Control and DC Retransmission.................................................................. 18.5
18.3.2. Relay Output...................................................................................................... 18.6
18.3.3. Triac Output....................................................................................................... 18.7
18.3.4. Triple Logic Output ........................................................................................... 18.8
18.3.5. Triple Logic and Triple Contact Input ............................................................... 18.8
18.3.6. PV Input ............................................................................................................ 18.9
18.3.7. Transmitter Power Supply ............................................................................... 18.10
18.3.8. Transducer Power Supply................................................................................ 18.10
18.3.9. Potentiometer Input ......................................................................................... 18.11
18.3.10. DC Input ........................................................................................................ 18.12
18.3.11. Dual PV Input................................................................................................ 18.13
18.4. MODULE SCALING ....................................................................................... 18.15
18.4.1. The PV Input ................................................................................................... 18.15
18.4.2. To Scale The PV Input:-.................................................................................. 18.16
18.4.3. Output modules ............................................................................................... 18.18
18.4.4. To Scale A Control Output:-............................................................................ 18.19
18.4.5. Retransmission Output .................................................................................... 18.20
18.4.6. To Scale A Retransmission Output:- ............................................................... 18.20
18.4.7. To Calibrate the Potentiometer input............................................................... 18.21
Contents 2704 Controller
a-12 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00
19. CHAPTER 19 TRANSDUCER SCALING.............................................................. 19.2
19.1. WHAT IS TRANSDUCER SCALING? ........................................................... 19.2
19.2. SHUNT CALIBRATION................................................................................... 19.3
19.2.1. To Calibrate a Strain Gauge Bridge Transducer ................................................ 19.4
19.3. LOAD CELL CALIBRATION.......................................................................... 19.5
19.3.1. To Calibrate a Load Cell.................................................................................... 19.7
19.4. COMPARISON CALIBRATION ..................................................................... 19.8
19.4.1. To Calibrate a Controller Against a Second Reference ..................................... 19.9
19.5. AUTO-TARE CALIBRATION....................................................................... 19.11
19.5.1. To Use the Auto-Tare Feature ......................................................................... 19.11
19.6. TRANSDUCER SCALING PARAMETERS................................................. 19.13
19.6.1. Parameter Notes............................................................................................... 19.14
20. CHAPTER 20 DIAGNOSTICS ................................................................................ 20.2
20.1. WHAT IS DIAGNOSTICS? .............................................................................. 20.2
20.1.1. Diagnostics parameters ...................................................................................... 20.2
A. APPENDIX A ORDER CODE.................................................................................... A.2
A. HARDWARE CODE............................................................................................... A.2
B. QUICK START CODE ........................................................................................... A.3
2704 Controller Contents
Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-13
B. APPENDIX B SAFETY AND EMC INFORMATION............................................. B.2
B.1. SAFETY................................................................................................................. B.2
B.1.1. Electromagnetic compatibility ............................................................................. B.2
B.2. SERVICE AND REPAIR ..................................................................................... B.2
B.2.1. Electrostatic discharge precautions ...................................................................... B.2
B.2.2. Cleaning............................................................................................................... B.2
B.3. INSTALLATION SAFETY REQUIREMENTS................................................ B.3
B.3.1. Safety Symbols.................................................................................................... .B.3
B.3.2. Personnel.............................................................................................................. B.3
B.3.3. Enclosure of live parts.......................................................................................... B.3
B.3.4. Isolation ...............................................................................................................B.3
B.3.5. Wiring ..................................................................................................................B.4
B.3.6. Power Isolation .................................................................................................... B.4
B.3.7. Earth leakage current ........................................................................................... B.4
B.3.8. Overcurrent protection ......................................................................................... B.5
B.3.9. Voltage rating ...................................................................................................... B.5
B.3.10. Conductive pollution.......................................................................................... B.5
B.3.11. Over-temperature protection .............................................................................. B.6
B.3.12. Grounding of the temperature sensor shield....................................................... B.6
B.4. INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS FOR EMC............................................. B.6
B.4.1. Routing of wires................................................................................................... B.6
C. APPENDIX C TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION...................................................... C.2
C.1. ALL ANALOGUE, DUAL AND PV INPUTS.................................................... C.2
C.2. PRECISION PV INPUT / MODULE.................................................................. C.3
C.3. DUAL (PROBE) INPUT MODULE.................................................................... C.3
C.4. ANALOGUE INPUT............................................................................................ C.4
C.5. ANALOGUE INPUT MODULE ......................................................................... C.4
C.6. STANDARD DIGITAL I/O ................................................................................. C.5
C.7. DIGITAL INPUT MODULES............................................................................. C.5
C.8. DIGITAL OUTPUT MODULES......................................................................... C.5
C.9. ANALOGUE OUTPUT MODULES................................................................... C.5
C.10. TRANSMITTER PSU ........................................................................................ C.5
Contents 2704 Controller
a-14 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00
C.11. TRANSDUCER PSU .......................................................................................... C.6
C.12. POTENTIOMETER INPUT ............................................................................. C.6
C.13. DIGITAL COMMUNICATIONS ..................................................................... C.6
C.14. ALARMS............................................................................................................. C.6
C.15. USER MESSAGES............................................................................................. C.6
C.16. CONTROL FUNCTIONS.................................................................................. C.6
C.17. SETPOINT PROGRAMMER........................................................................... C.7
C.18. ADVANCED FUNCTIONS ............................................................................... C.7
C.19. GENERAL SPECIFICATION .......................................................................... C.7
C.20. GRAPHICAL REPRESENTATION OF ERRORS......................................... C.8
C.20.1. mV Input ............................................................................................................ C.8
C.20.2. Mid range high impedance Input ....................................................................... C.9
C.20.3. High Level Input .............................................................................................. C.10
C.20.4. RTD (Pt-100) Input type................................................................................. C.11
C.20.5. Thermocouple Input type ................................................................................. C.13
2704 Controller Contents
Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-15
LIST OF FIGURES
Figure 1-1: General View of 2704 Controller...................................................................... 1.3
Figure 1-2: General View of 2704 Controller...................................................................... 1.5
Figure 1-3: Operator Interface ............................................................................................. 1.6
Figure 1-4: Rear Terminals .................................................................................................. 1.8
Figure 1-5: View of the Plug-in Modules ............................................................................ 1.9
Figure 2-1: Outline Dimensions............................................................................................. 2.2
Figure 2-2: Panel Cut-out and Minimum Spacing Requirements........................................... 2.3
Figure 2-3: Rear Terminal Connections ................................................................................ 2.5
Figure 2-4: Wiring Connections For Line Voltage.................................................................. 2.6
Figure 2-5: Wiring Connections For Fixed Relay Output ....................................................... 2.6
Figure 2-6: Wiring Connections For PV Input........................................................................ 2.7
Figure 2-7: Wiring Connections For Analogue Input.............................................................. 2.8
Figure 2-8: Wiring Connections for the I/O Expander............................................................ 2.9
Figure 2-9: Wiring Connections for Digital I/O..................................................................... 2.10
Figure 2-10: RS232 Communications Connections............................................................. 2.11
Figure 2-11: RS485 2- Wire Communications Connections ................................................ 2.11
Figure 2-12: RS485 4-Wire Communications Connections ................................................. 2.12
Figure 2-13: Profibus Wiring Connections........................................................................... 2.12
Figure 2-14: Wiring Connections for IO Modules ................................................................ 2.17
Figure 2-15: Wiring Connections for Zirconia Probe............................................................ 2.18
Figure 3-1: The 'HOME' Page (default) ............................................................................... 3.4
Figure 3-2: Operator Buttons ............................................................................................... 3.5
Figure 3-3: Loop Summary and Loop Trend Chart.............................................................. 3.6
Figure 3-4: Changing Setpoint............................................................................................. 3.8
Figure 3-5: Changing Output Power.................................................................................... 3.8
Figure 3-6: Page Types ........................................................................................................ 3.9
Figure 3-7: Changing Parameter Values for Different Parameter Types............................ 3.14
Figure 3-8: Cascade Loop View ........................................................................................ 3.16
Figure 3-9: Override Loop View........................................................................................ 3.17
Contents 2704 Controller
a-16 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00
Figure 3-10: Ratio Loop View........................................................................................... 3.18
Figure 3-11: Navigation Diagram………………………… ……………………………3-21
Figure 6-1: A Setpoint Program........................................................................................... 6.3
Figure 6-2: Wait Events ....................................................................................................... 6.6
Figure 6-3: An Example of a Program with Repeating Section ......................................... 6.10
Figure 6A-1: An Example of a Programmed Digital Output............................................. 6A.2
Figure 9-1: Cascade with Feedforward .............................................................................. 9.10
Figure 9-2: Simple Ratio Control Block Diagram ............................................................. 9.11
Figure 9-3: Simple Override Control ................................................................................. 9.13
Figure 10-1: An Example of 2704 Wiring for Carbon Potential Control........................... 10.4
Figure 10-2: Humidity Control Block................................................................................ 10.8
Figure 10-3: Example of Humidity Controller Connections .............................................. 10.9
Figure 11-1: Linearisation Example................................................................................... 11.3
Figure 11-2: Compensation for Sensor Discontinuities ...................................................... 11.7
Figure 11-3: Thermocouple to Pyrometer Switching .......................................................... 11.8
Figure 12-1: On Pulse Timer Under Different Input Conditions ....................................... 12.4
Figure 12-2: Off Delay Timer Under Different Input Conditions ...................................... 12.5
Figure 12-3: One Shot Timer ............................................................................................. 12.6
Figure 12-4: Minimum On Timer Under Different Input Conditions ................................ 12.7
Figure 14-1: Analogue Operators....................................................................................... 14.2
Figure 15-1: Logic Operators............................................................................................. 15.2
Figure 17-1: Input Scaling (Standard IO) .......................................................................... 17.3
2704 Controller Contents
Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 a-17
Figure 18-1: Input Scaling (Modules).............................................................................. 18.15
Figure 18-2: Time Proportioning Relay, Triac or Logic Output ...................................... 18.18
Figure 18-3: Scaling a Retransmission Output ................................................................ 18.20
Figure 19-1: Strain Gauge Calibration............................................................................... 19.3
Figure 19-2: Load Cell Calibration.................................................................................... 19.6
Figure 19-3: Comparison Calibration ................................................................................ 19.8
Figure 19-4: Effect of Auto-Tare ..................................................................................... 19.12
Figure B-1: Analogue Input and Fixed Digital I/O Equivalent Circuit ................................ B.4
Figure C-1: Error Graph - mV Input ................................................................................... C.8
Figure C-2: Error Graph - 0 - 2V Input............................................................................... C.9
Figure C-3: Error Graph - 0 - 10V Input........................................................................... C.10
Figure C-4: Error Graph - RTD Input ............................................................................... C.12
Figure C-5: Overall CJT Error at Different Ambient Temperatures.................................. C.13
Contents 2704 Controller
a-18 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00
2704 Controller Introduction
Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 1-1
1. Chapter 1 INTRODUCTION ............................................... 2
1.1. ABOUT THIS MANUAL......................................................................2
1.1.1. The Structure Of This Manual ..................................................................... 2
1.2. WHAT IS 2704 ....................................................................................3
1.3. BEFORE YOU BEGIN........................................................................4
1.3.1. Unpacking ................................................................................................... 4
1.3.2. Contents of Packaging ................................................................................ 4
1.3.3. Does the Controller Match the Process?..................................................... 4
1.4. OPERATOR INTERFACE - OVERVIEW............................................6
1.4.1. Status Messages......................................................................................... 7
1.5. INSTALLATION - OVERVIEW ...........................................................8
1.6. I/O MODULES ....................................................................................9
Introduction 2704 Controller
1-2 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00
1. Chapter 1 INTRODUCTIONThank you for selecting the 2704 High Performance Programmer/Controller. This chapterprovides a general overview of your controller to help you to become more familiar with itsuse, and to ensure that it is the correct type for your process.
1.1. ABOUT THIS MANUAL
This manual is intended for those who wish to install, operate or commission the controller.Operation of the controller is provided by three levels of security access. This manual,therefore, is confined to these levels.
The three levels of access are:-
Level 1 Operation only. This level allows, for example, parameters to be changedwithin safe limits or programmers to be run, held or reset.
Level 2 Supervisory level. This level allows, for example, parameter limits to be pre-set or programs to be edited or created.
Level 3 Commissioning level. This level is intended for use when commissioning theinstrument. It allows, for example, calibration offsets to be adjusted to matchtransducer and transmitter characteristics.
ViewConfig
It is possible also to read the configuration of the controller at any level but theconfiguration cannot be changed.
Configuration of the controller is available in a fourth level of access. This is explained in aseparate engineering manual, available on request by quoting Part Number HA026933.
1.1.1. The Structure Of This Manual
This chapter provides a general overview of the controller
Chapter 2 describes how to mount and wire the controller.
Chapter 3 explains the principle of operation
The remaining chapters explain the operation of individual features of the controller. Thesechapters follow the order in which the features appear in the pull out navigation diagram inchapter 2.In each chapter the purpose of the feature is described, followed by its operation, and, whereapplicable, includes worked examples of how to set up specific aspects of a feature.
2704 Controller Introduction
Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 1-3
1.2. WHAT IS 2704
The 2704 is a high accuracy, high stability temperature and process controller which isavailable in a single, dual or three loop format. It has a 120 x 160 pixel electroluminescentused to show all process information. The user interface is menu driven via the display andseven front panel keys.
When the 2704 is configured as a programmer itprovides advanced programming facilities such as:• storage of up to 50 programs.• up to three variables can be profiled in each
program, or one profile can be assigned to run inmore than one loop.
• up to sixteen event outputs can be assigned toeach program.
Special machine controllers can be created byconnecting analogue and digital parameters to thecontrol loops, either directly or by using a selectionof mathematical and logical functions.
Figure 1-1: General View of 2704 Controller
Other features include:
• A wide variety of inputs which can be configured, including thermocouples, Pt100resistance thermometers and high level process inputs.
• Direct connection of zirconia oxygen probes is also supported for use in heat treatmentfurnaces and ceramic kiln applications.
• Each loop can be defined to be PID, On/Off or motorised valve position and can controlusing a variety of strategies including single, cascade, override and ratio control.
• PID control outputs can be relay, logic, triac or dc with motorised valve position outputsbeing relay triac or logic.
• Auto tuning and PID gain scheduling are available to simplify commissioning andoptimise the process
Configuration of the controller is explained in a separate Engineering Manual, Part No.HA026933. Configuration is achieved either via the front panel operator interface or byusing ‘iTools’ - a configuration package which runs under the Windows 95, or NT operatingsystems.
Introduction 2704 Controller
1-4 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00
1.3. BEFORE YOU BEGIN
1.3.1. UnpackingAll parts comprising the 2704 are boxed individually. The packaging is designed towithstand reasonable transit shocks. It is suggested that each item is unpacked carefully andthe contents inspected for damage.
If there is evidence of shipping damage, please notify your supplier within 72 hours. Thepackaging should be retained for inspection.
All packaging contains anti-static materials to prevent the build up of static which candamage electronic assemblies.
1.3.2. Contents of PackagingEach box contains the following parts:-
1. The 2704 controller fitted into its corresponding sleeve. Labels on the sleeve identify thecontroller code, its serial number, and the customer reference number. These detailsshould be checked against your requirements before installing the unit into the panel. Adescription of the instrument code is given in Appendix A.
2. Two panel retaining clips3. Burden resistors for use with mA inputs4. This Installation and Operation Handbook
Please refer to Figure 1-2 showing a general view of the controller.
1.3.3. Does the Controller Match the Process?Every controller is supplied with a specific hardware configuration to match the processwhich it is designed to control. For example, there are five ‘slots’ which can contain differentplug in modules. These are defined by a hardware code as shown in Appendix A. Beforeinstalling the 2704 controller check the label on the side of the instrument against theinstrument coding given in Appendix A for correct type.
Where possible the controller is supplied with its software configured to match the process.This is defined by a quick start order code given in Appendix A. This should also be checkedon the instrument label to ensure that the controller is suitable for the process to becontrolled.The 2704 controller contains a large number of variants to fulfil the demands of specificprocesses. In general the software configuration can be changed through the front panel ofthe controller. The procedures are described both in this manual and the EngineeringManual, Part No. HA026933. Alternatively, ‘iTools’ configuration software may be used toconfigure the controller. The order code for this is also shown in Appendix A.
2704 Controller Introduction
Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 1-5
Figure 1-2: General View of 2704 Controller
➀
➁
➆➇
➃
➄
➅
➂➇
➁➃
KEY
➀ Display screen
➁ Latching ears
➂ Panel sealing gasket
➃ Panel retaining clips
➄ Label
➅ Sleeve
➆ Terminal covers
➇ Ratchets
Introduction 2704 Controller
1-6 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00
1.4. OPERATOR INTERFACE - OVERVIEW
The front panel of the 2704 consists of a 120 x 160 pixel electroluminscent display, andseven operator push-buttons. See Figure 1-3.
• The display is used to show the process conditions.
• The seven operator buttons allow adjustments to be made to the controller.
Page button Press to select a new list of parameters.
Scroll button Press to select a new parameter in a list.
Down button Press to decrease a parameter value.
Up button Press to increase a parameter value.
Figure 1-3: Operator Interface
SP
Operator buttons
Alarm Beacon(appears at the
left of the bannerwhen an alarm is
present)
Auto/Manual
SetpointSource
Programmer/Autotune status
Loop Type
PV
Units or [SBY]
Output level
This is a view ofLoop 1 Page
2704 Controller Introduction
Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 1-7
1.4.1. Status MessagesMessages appear on the display to show the current status of the controller. Table 1-1 belowdescribes these messages:-
LP1, LP2,LP3
Indicates which loop is being viewed
AUT The selected loop is in automatic (closed loop) control
MAN The selected loop is in manual (open loop) control
SP1, SP2,PO, REM
Indicates where the SP is derived, i.e. Setpoint 1, Setpoint 2, Programmer,Remote
CSD Indicates that the loop is in cascade.
OVR Indicates that the loop is in override.
RAT Indicates that the loop is in ratio (Ratio must be enabled from the parameterlist at the bottom of the display)
Indicates a program is activated
Indicates a program is held at its current levels
Indicates a program is in reset condition i.e. not running
When an alarm occurs an alarm symbol flashes in the header banner. Whenthe alarm is acknowledged but is still active the symbol will be permanently lit.When the alarm is acknowledged but is no longer active the symbol willdisappear.
See Chapter 7 ‘Alarm Operation’ for further details.
[UNITS] The process units are displayed in the right hand side of the banner
[SBY] This symbol will flash in the right hand side of the banner in place of ‘units’when the controller is in standby mode. In this state all interfaces to the plantare switched to a rest condition. For example, all control outputs = 0.
When this symbol is on the controller is no longer controlling theprocess.
This symbol will be on when:-
• The controller is in configuration mode
• Standby mode has been selected through the user interface or via anexternal digital input
• During the first few seconds after start up
Table 1-1: Status Messages
Introduction 2704 Controller
1-8 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00
1.5. INSTALLATION - OVERVIEW
The 2704 controller must be mounted and wired in accordance with the instructions given inChapter 2.
The controller is intended to be mounted through a cut out in the front panel of an electricalcontrol cabinet. It is retained in position using the panel mounting clips supplied.
All wires are connected to terminals at the rear of the instrument. Each block of six terminalsis protected by a hinged cover which clicks into closed position.
Figure 1-4: Rear Terminals
Hingedcover inopenposition
N
L
BB
BA
BC
2D
2B
2A
2C
1D
1B
1A
1C
MODULE1
MODULE3
HF
HD
HE
JF
JD
JE
D8
E2
E1
AC
AA
AB
HB
HA
HC
JB
JA
JC
D5
D4
D3
D1
DC
D2
D7
D6
V-
VI
VH
V+
MODULE4
MODULE5
MODULE6
PowerSupply
DigitalInput
Relay
Analogueinput0-10V
6D
6C
6B
6A
5D
5C
5B
5A
4D
4C
4B
4A
PVinput
I/OExpanderor Digitalinput
DigitalI/O
3B
3A
3C
3D
COMMS
MODULEH
COMMS
MODULEJ
Analogueinputscreen
The functionality of the two outer rows of terminals iscommon to all instrument variants, as follows:-
PV input VH, VI, V+, V-Analogue input BA, BBI/O expander E1, E2Fixed changeover relay AA, AB, ACDigital I/O channels D1 to D8 and DCPower supply L, N, Earth
* Terminals 2A, 2B, 2C, 2D must not be wired to.
*
*
*
*
2704 Controller Introduction
Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 1-9
1.6. I/O MODULES
The 2704 controller has the facility to fit optional plug in modules. The connections for thesemodules are made to the inner three connector blocks as shown in Figure 1-4The modules are:• Communications modules. See also section 2.4• I/O modules See also section 2.5
These modules are fitted simply by sliding them into the relevant position as shown in Figure1-5.
Figure 1-5: View of the Plug-in Modules
Introduction 2704 Controller
1-10 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00
2704 Controller Installation
Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 2-1
2. CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION ............................................. 2
2.1. MECHANICAL INSTALLATION.........................................................2
2.1.1. Positioning................................................................................................... 2
2.1.2. Outline dimensions Model 2704 .................................................................. 2
2.1.3. Mounting the Controller ............................................................................... 3
2.1.4. Unplugging and Plugging in the Controller.................................................. 3
2.2. WIRING...............................................................................................4
2.2.1. Electrical Connections................................................................................. 4
2.2.2. Rear Terminal Layout.................................................................................. 4
2.3. STANDARD CONNECTIONS ............................................................6
2.3.1. Power Supply Wiring (Line voltage) ............................................................ 6
2.3.2. Relay Output ............................................................................................... 6
2.3.3. Sensor Input Connections ........................................................................... 7
2.3.4. Analogue Input Connections ....................................................................... 8
2.3.5. I/O Expander (or Additional Digital Input) .................................................... 9
2.3.6. Digital I/O................................................................................................... 10
2.4. OPTIONAL PLUG IN MODULE CONNECTIONS ...........................11
2.4.1. Digital Communications Connections........................................................ 11
2.4.2. I/O Modules ............................................................................................... 13
2.5. TO CONNECT ZIRCONIA (DUAL SIGNAL) PROBE ......................18
2.5.1. Zirconia Probe Screening.......................................................................... 19
Installation 2704 Controller
2-2 Installation and Operation Handbook Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00
2. Chapter 2 INSTALLATION
2.1. MECHANICAL INSTALLATION
2.1.1. PositioningThe controller can be mounted vertically or on a sloping panel of maximum thickness 15mm(0.6in). Adequate access space must be available at the rear of the instrument panel forwiring and servicing purposes. The outline dimensions are shown in figure 2-1.Take care not to cover ventilation holes in the top, bottom and sides of the instrument.
Before proceeding please read Appendix B ‘Safety and EMC Information’.
2.1.2. Outline dimensions Model 2704
Figure 2-1: Outline Dimensions
FrontPanelHeight96mm(3.78in)
Overall depth behindpanel 150mm(5.91in)Front panel
width 96mm(3.78in)
Panel thickness upto 12mm, 0.5in.
2704 Controller Installation
Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 2-3
2.1.3. Mounting the Controller
1. Prepare the panel cut-out to the size shown in Figure 2-2. Ensure that there is sufficientspacing between instruments as shown by the minimum dimensions given in Figure 2-2.Ensure also that the controller is not mounted close to any device which is likely toproduce a significant amount of heat which may affect the performance of the controller.
2. Insert the controller through the panel cut-out.
3. Spring the upper and lower panel retaining clips into place. Secure the controller inposition by holding it level and pushing both retaining clips forward.
Note:- If the retaining clips subsequently need removing, in order to extract the controllerfrom the control panel, they can be unhooked from the side with either your fingers or ascrewdriver.
Figure 2-2: Panel Cut-out and Minimum Spacing Requirements
2.1.4. Unplugging and Plugging in the ControllerIf required, the controller can be unplugged from its sleeve by easing the latching earsoutwards and pulling the controller forward out of the sleeve. When plugging the controllerback into its sleeve, ensure that the latching ears click into place.
It is recommended that the power to the controller is switched off when un-plugging orplugging the controller into its sleeve. This is to prevent premature wear on the controllerconnectors when current is flowing through them.
Panel cut-out
92 x 92 mm
3.62 x 3.62 in
-0+0.8
-0+0.03
Recommendedminimumspacing ofcontrollers
38mm(1.5in)
10mm(0.4in)
(Not toscale)
Installation 2704 Controller
2-4 Installation and Operation Handbook Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00
2.2. WIRING
WARNINGYou must ensure that the controller is correctly configured for your application.Incorrect configuration could result in damage to the process being controlled, and/orpersonal injury. It is your responsibility, as the installer, to ensure that theconfiguration is correct. The controller may either have been configured when ordered,or may need configuring now. See 2704 Engineering Manual Part Number HA026933 fordetails.
Before proceeding further, please read Appendix B, Safety and EMC information.
2.2.1. Electrical Connections
All electrical connections are made to the screw terminals at the rear of the controller. Theyaccept wire sizes from 0.5 to 1.5 mm2 (16 to 22 AWG) and should be tightened to a torque of0.4Nm (3.5lbin). If you wish to use crimp connectors, the correct size is AMP part number349262-1. The terminals are protected by a clear plastic hinged cover to prevent hands, ormetal, making accidental contact with live wires.
2.2.2. Rear Terminal Layout
The rear terminal layout is shown in Figure 2-3, which identifies terminal designations andtheir functions. Refer to the individual diagrams to wire the controller to your requirements.
The two outer terminal strips have fixed hardware for all versions of the instrument, asfollows:-
• A Process Variable input which can be configured for:-• Thermocouple, RTD, Pyrometer, Voltage (e.g. 0-10Vdc) or Milliamp (e.g. 4-
20mA) signals
• Seven Digital I/O, configurable as input or output.• Inputs are logic (-1 to 35Vdc) or contact closure, and can be configured for:-
Manual, Remote, Run, Hold, Reset, etc,.• Outputs are open collector requiring an external power supply, and can be
configured as event, status time proportioning or valve position outputs.• One digital input• An I/O expander which allows additional digital I/O via an external unit.
• A changeover relay which can be configured as an alarm or event output. It cannot beconfigured as a time proportioning output.
• An analogue input for volts (e.g. 0-10Vdc) or Milliamp (e.g. 4-20mA) signals to a secondPID loop, setpoint, etc,. (This input can be characterised to match a particular curve froma transmitter. It cannot accept thermocouple inputs directly).
• Power supply to the unit. The supply may be 85 - 264Vac 50 or 60 Hz,
The three central terminal strips are for optional plug in modules, as follows:-
2704 Controller Installation
Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 2-5
• Terminals marked 2A to 2D are reserved for a Memory Module only. No connectionsshould be made to these terminals.
• Terminals marked HA to HF are connections for optional RS232, RS485, or RS422communications modules.
• Terminals marked JA to JF are connections for an optional slave communications moduleor second communications port used to communicate with other instruments.
The modules fitted into the above two communications slots can be inter-changed.
For a full list of available modules refer to the Ordering code - Appendix A and the TechnicalSpecification - Appendix C. The functionality of these modules is given in subsequentchapters.
Caution, (refer to the accompanying documents)
Functional earth (ground) terminal!
Figure 2-3: Rear Terminal Connections
N
L
BB
BA
BC
2D
2B
2A
2C
1D
1B
1A
1C
MODULE1
MODULE3
HF
HD
HE
JF
JD
JE
D8
E2
E1
AC
AA
AB
HB
HA
HC
JB
JA
JC
D5
D4
D3
D1
DC
D2
D7
D6
V-
V1
VH
V+
MODULE4
MODULE5
MODULE6
PowerSupply
DigitalInput
Relay
Analogueinput HiLevel eg0-10V
6D
6C
6B
6A
5D
5C
5B
5A
4D
4C
4B
4A
PVinput
I/OExpanderor Digitalinput
DigitalI/O
3B
3A
3C
3D
COMMS
MODULEH
COMMS
MODULEJ
Remoteinputscreen
Warning:- Take care that mains supplies are connected only to the power supplyterminals (85 to 254Vac only), the fixed relay terminals or to relay or triacmodules. Under no circumstances should mains supplies be connected to anyother terminals.
Installation 2704 Controller
2-6 Installation and Operation Handbook Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00
2.3. STANDARD CONNECTIONS
2.3.1. Power Supply Wiring (Line voltage)The 2704 controller is suitable for connection to a power supply of between 85 and 264Vac50 or 60 Hz. It is the users responsibility to provide an external fuse or circuit breaker.Suitable fuses are T type (EN60127 time-lag type) rated at 1A
Figure 2-4: Wiring Connections For Line Voltage
2.3.2. Relay OutputA single changeover relay is provided as standard. It can be configured as a control output oran alarm or event output.
Figure 2-5: Wiring Connections For Fixed Relay Output
Line 85 to 264Vac
Neutral
Earth
L
N
85 to 264Vac Voltage Supply
Fixed relay connections
AC
AA
AB
NormallyOpen
NormallyClosed
Common
2704 Controller Installation
Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 2-7
2.3.3. Sensor Input Connections
The fixed PV input can accept a range of sensors including Thermocouple, RTD (Pt100),Pyrometer, Voltage (e.g. 0-10Vdc) or Milliamp (e.g. 4-20mA) signals. These sensors areused to provide inputs to Control Loop 1.
Figure 2-6: Wiring Connections For PV Input
VH
VI
V-
V+
Thermocouple or Pyrometer
Use the correct type ofcompensating cableto extend wiring
+
-
VH
VI
V-
V+
Voltage 0 to 10V or 0 to 2V
+
-
0 - 10Volt
source
VH
VI
V-
V+
mV (up to 80mV)
+
-
mVoltsource
VH
VI
V-
V+
Current 0 to 20mA (4 to 20mA)
+
-
2.49Ωresistorsupplied
Currentsource
VH
VI
V-
V+
RTD (Pt100)
3-wireplatinumresistancethermometer
For 2-wirethis is alocal link
Installation 2704 Controller
2-8 Installation and Operation Handbook Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00
2.3.4. Analogue Input ConnectionsThe analogue input is supplied as standard and is intended to accept 0 to 10 Vdc from avoltage source. A milli-amp current source can be used by connecting a 100Ω resistor acrossterminals BA and BB. This input can be used as a remote setpoint input, remote setpoint trimor as a high level PV input to a control loop. This input is not isolated from the digital IO.
Figure 2-7: Wiring Connections For Analogue Input
Isolated Voltage Source (0 to 10V)
Non-isolated Voltage Source (0 to 10V)
Non-isolated0 to10Vdcsource
Screen
BC
BA
BB
100Ω
If screened cable isused earth at the supplyend
Non-isolated Current Source (0 - 20mA) (4 - 20mA)
Non-isolatedcurrentsource
BC
BA
BB
If screened cable isused earth at the supplyend
Isolated0 to10Vdcsource
BC
BA
BB
100Ω
Isolated Current Source (0 - 20mA) (4 - 20mA)
Isolatedcurrentsource
BC
BA
BB
Screen
+
-
+
-
+
-
+
-
2704 Controller Installation
Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 2-9
2.3.5. I/O Expander (or Additional Digital Input)The I/O expander is used with the 2704 to allow the number of I/O points to be increased bya further 20 digital inputs and 20 digital outputs. Data transfer is performed serially via a twowire interface from instrument to expander.If the expander unit is not required it is possible to use terminals E1 & E2 as a secondarydigital input. These terminals are not part of the digital I/O on terminals D1 to D8 and if usedin this way connect a 2K2, ¼ W limiting resistor in series with the input, as shown in Figure2-8.
Figure 2-8: Wiring Connections for the I/O Expander
I/O expander connections
E1
E2
20 Inputs
20 Outputs
Expander
Datatransfer
I/O expander connections
E1
E2
+
-
Additional digital input if theexpander is not used
2K2Limits:
-1V, +35V
Installation 2704 Controller
2-10 Installation and Operation Handbook Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00
2.3.6. Digital I/OEight digital I/O connections are provided as standard. They can be configured as:1. Inputs Run, Hold, Reset, Auto/Manual, etc, - logic or contact closure.2. Outputs Configurable as Control outputs, Programmer Events, Alarms, etc.Digital IO is not isolated from instrument ground.
Figure 2-9: Wiring Connections for Digital I/O
Digital Outputs (Relay, Thyristor or SSR Drive in any combination)
D5
D7
D6
D1
DC
D2
D4
D3
Outputs areopen collector
_+
Relay
Relay
Relay
ThyristorUnit
ThyristorUnit
SSR
SSR
External power supply 10 to 35 Vdc.Each output is current limited to 40mA
Digital Inputs (Logic Inputs or Contact Closure in any combination)
D5
D7
D6
D1
DC
D2
D4
D3 D8This terminal can beused for DigitalInput only (not DO)
Common
Common
Logicinputs (1)
Contactclosureinputs
Note 1:Logic inputs can accept drive signals froma voltage source where:<2V = Active (1) Limit -1V>4V = Inactive (0) Limit +35VThis action is reversed if the input hasbeen configured as ‘Inverted’
2704 Controller Installation
Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 2-11
2.4. OPTIONAL PLUG IN MODULE CONNECTIONS
2.4.1. Digital Communications ConnectionsDigital Communications modules can be fitted in two positions in the 2704 controller, (seealso section 1.5). The connections being available on HA to HF and JA to JF depending onthe position in which the module is fitted. The two positions could be used, for example, tocommunicate with ‘iTools’ configuration package on one position, and to a PC running asupervisory package on the second position.
The connections shown in the following diagrams show RS232, 2-wire RS485, 4-wire RS422and master/slave comms to a second controller.
The diagrams show connections for ‘bench top test’ wiring. For a full description of theinstallation of a communications link, including line resistors, see CommunicationsHandbook, Part No. HA026230, and EMC Installation Guide, part no. HA025464.
Figure 2-10: RS232 Communications Connections
Figure 2-11: RS485 2- Wire Communications Connections
RS232
HF
HB
HA
HC
HE
HD Common
Com
Rx
PC
Tx
TxRx
RS285 - 2 wire
HF
HB
HA
HC
HE
HD Common
A(+)
B(-)
RS232 toRS4852-wire
converter
TxRx
PC
Com
RxARxB TxB
TxACom
Connections ‘daisychained’ to other
instruments
Installation 2704 Controller
2-12 Installation and Operation Handbook Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00
Figure 2-12: RS485 4-Wire Communications Connections
Figure 2-13: Profibus Wiring Connections
RS485 4-wire(or RS422)
HF
HB
HA
HC
HE
HD Common
A(Tx+)
B (Tx-)
TxRx
PC
Com
A’ (Rx+)
B’ (Rx-)RS232 to
RS422/RS4854-wire
converterRxB
RxA TxBTxACom
Connections ‘daisychained’ to other
instruments
Profibus
TxRx
PC
Com
HF
HB
HA
HC
HE
HD Rx/Tx +ve
Rx/Tx -ve
Dig Grnd
Shield
VP (+5V)
RS232 toRS422/RS485
4-wireconverter
RxBRxA TxA
TxBCom
Connections ‘daisychained’ to other
instruments
HF
HB
HA
HC
HE
HD
Shield
390Ω
390Ω
220Ω
Last controller onlyrequires terminating
resistors
Rx/Tx +ve
Rx/Tx -ve
Dig Grnd
VP (+5V)
Twisted pairs
2704 Controller Installation
Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 2-13
2.4.2. I/O ModulesThe 2704 controller contains five positions in which 4-terminal I/O modules can be fitted.These positions are marked Module 1, Module 3, Module 4, Module 5, Module 6, in Figure2-3. Module 2 is reserved for the Memory Module which can only be fitted in this position.To find out which modules are fitted check the ordering code which is found on a label on theside of the instrument.Any module, listed in this section, can be fitted in any position, except the PV input which islimited to positions 3 and 6 only. Care should be taken, therefore, to ensure that modules arefitted as expected from the order code. The instrument can be interrogated in ‘View Config’level to locate the positions in which the modules are fitted. See Chapter 4, Access Levels. Ifmodules have been added, removed or changed it is recommended that this is recorded on theinstrument code label.
I/O Module Typicalusage
H/WCode
Connections and examples of use
Note: The order code and terminal number is pre-fixed by the module number.
Module 1 is connected to terminals 1A, 1B, 1C, 1D; module 3 to 3A, 3B, 3C, 3D, etc.
Relay (2 pin)andDual Relay
2A, 264Vacmax1mA 1V min
Heating,cooling,alarm,programevent,valve raise,valve lower
R2andRR
Change OverRelay
(2A, 264Vacmax)
Heating,cooling,alarm,programevent, valveraise, valvelower
R4
Triple LogicOutput
(18Vdc at8mA max.)
Heating,cooling,programevents
TP A
B
D
C +
___
+
+
+Output A
Output B
Output C
Common
SSR orthyristorunit
+
-
A
B
D
C
Voltagesupply
ContactorRelay
Panel lampetc
ContactorRelay
Panel lampetc
First relay
Second relay(dual relay only)
A
B
D
CVoltagesupply
ContactorRelay
Panel lampetc
Installation 2704 Controller
2-14 Installation and Operation Handbook Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00
I/O Module Typicalusage
H/WCode
Connections and examples of use
Triacand DualTriac
(0.7A, 30 to264Vaccombinedrating)
Heating,cooling,valve raise,valve lower
T2andTT
Note: Dual relay modules may be used in placeof dual triac.
Note:-The combined current rating for the twotriacs must not exceed 0.7A.
DC Control
(10Vdc, 20mAmax)
Heating,cooling
e.g. to a4-20mAprocessactuator
D4
DC Re-transmission
(10Vdc, 20mAmax)
Logging ofPV, SP,outputpower, etc.,
(0 to 10Vdc,or0 to 20mA)
D6
A
B
D
C
Actuator0-20mA
or0-10Vdc -
+
A
B
D
C
To othercontrollers0-20mA
or0-10Vdc
-
+
A
B
D
C
Voltagesupply
Motorisedvalve
Raise
Lower Second triac
First triac
2704 Controller Installation
Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 2-15
I/O Module Typicalusage
OrderCode
Connections and examples of use
PV Input(Modules3 & 6 only)
and
AnalogueInput(Modules1, 3, 4 & 6only)
Second orthird PVinput
mV, V, mA,TC,RTD (Pt100)Zirconiaprobe
Second orthird PVinput
mV, mA,TC,RTD (Pt100)
PV
AM
Voltage 0 to 10V or 0 to 2V
A
B
D
C
+
-
0 - 10Volt
source
mV (up to 80mV)
A
B
D
C
+
-
mVoltsource
For 2-wire thisis a local link
A
B
D
C
Thermocouple
-
+
A
B
D
C
3-wire RTD
Current 0 to 20mA (4 to 20mA)
A
B
D
C
+
-
2.49Ωresistorsupplied
Currentsource
Installation 2704 Controller
2-16 Installation and Operation Handbook Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00
I/O Module Typicalusage
OrderCode
Connections and examples of use
Triple LogicInput
Events
e.g. ProgramRun, Reset,Hold
TL
TripleContactInput
Events
e.g. ProgramRun, Reset,Hold
TK
24VTransmitterSupply
(20mA)
To power anexternaltransmitter
MS A
B
D
C
+
-Transmitter
A
B
D
C
Common
Input 1
Input 3
Input 2
Logic inputs
<5V OFF>10.8V ONLimits:-3V, +30V
A
B
D
C
Common
ExternalSwitches or
Relays
Input 1
Input 3
Input 2
Contactinputs<100* ON>28K* OFF
2704 Controller Installation
Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 2-17
TransducerPowerSupply
Provide 5Vor 10Vdc topower StrainGaugeTransducer
G3orG5
Note: To minimise noise pick up it isrecommended that screened cables are used forstrain guage power supply connections.
Potentio-meter Input
(100Ω to15KΩ)
Motorisedvalvepositionfeedback
Remote SP
VU
Dual PVInput(Modules 3& 6 only)
To accepttwo inputsfrom a highlevel and alow levelsource.The twoinputs arenot isolatedfrom eachother.
DP
The common connections to terminal D must bereturned separately to D as shown in the dualcurrent example above.
Figure 2-14: Wiring Connections for IO Modules
A
B
D
C
_
+
AB
D
C
ToFixedorModulePVInput
External calibrationresistor (may be fittedin transducer).
A
B
D0v
C
+0.5v
Wiper
A
B
D
C
+
-
Currentsource
0-2Vinput
Currentsource
0-20mAinput
100Ω
2.49Ω
+
-
Installation 2704 Controller
2-18 Installation and Operation Handbook Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00
2.5. TO CONNECT ZIRCONIA (DUAL SIGNAL) PROBE
A dual signal probe, such as a Zirconia probe, will normally be connected to a Dual PV Inputmodule (Code DP). The module presents two channels, A and C, where A is the voltageinput and C is the mV, thermocouple, RTD or mA input.
Example 1 shown below uses the Dual PV Input module with both channels configured. Inthis configuration the module runs at 4.5Hz. The two channels are un-isolated from one-another but isolated from the rest of the instrument.
Example 2 uses two modules. The modules can either be two PV Input modules (code PV)or a Dual PV Input module (code DP) with Channel C configured as ‘None’ plus a PV Inputmodule. This combination runs at 9Hz and may be used if the loop is unusually fast.
I/O Module Typicalusage
OrderCode
Connections and examples of use
Dual PVInput
Zirconiaprobe
DP Example 1:- Using the Dual PV Input Module.Channel C is shown configured for thermocouple.The temperature sensor of a zirconia probe isconnected to this input, terminals C & D. TheVolt Source is connected to the A channel,terminals A & D.
Two PVInputModules
PV Example 2:- Using Two ModulesThe temperature sensor of the zirconia probe canbe connected to the precision PV input of one I/Omodule, connections C & D, with the Volt Sourceconnected to the second module, terminals A &D.
For further information see Chapter 10.Figure 2-15: Wiring Connections for Zirconia Probe
A
B+
-
ZirconiaVolt
source
D
C+
-
C
D
A
B
D
C
+
-Zirconia
Voltsource +
-
Note: The +ve of the voltsource must be connected tothe-ve of the thermocouple.
2704 Controller Installation
Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 2-19
2.5.1. Zirconia Probe Screening
2.5.1.1. Zirconia Carbon Probe Construction
2.5.1.2. Screening connections when two modules are used
The zirconia sensor wires should be screened and connected to the outer shell of the probe ifit is situated in an area of high interference.
2.5.1.3. Screening connections when a dual input module is used
Both the thermocouple and the zirconia sensor wires must be screened and connected to theouter shell of the probe if it is situated in an area of high interference.Note the reverse connection of the zirconia sensor .
D
D
C
B
A
B
A
Outer Electrode
Inner Electrode
Screen
Zirc. mV
T.C.
-
+
-
+
C
-
+
-
+
Screened Cable
Outer Electrode
Inner Electrode
Screen
Zirc. mV
T.C.
-
+
D
C
B
A-+
-
+
-
+
Screened Cable
Screened Compensating Cable
Outer Electrode
Inner ElectrodeCeramic Insulator
ZirconiaSensor
Hot End
Screen
Zirc. mV
Thermocouple
-+
-+
Outer metallic shell of the probe
Installation 2704 Controller
2-20 Installation and Operation Handbook Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00
2704 Controller Getting Started
Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 3-1
3. CHAPTER 3 GETTING STARTED ...................................... 23.1. POWER UP ..................................................................................................33.1.1. The HOME Page.........................................................................................33.2. THE OPERATOR BUTTONS....................................................................43.3. THE PROG BUTTON.................................................................................53.4. THE LOOP SELECT BUTTON.................................................................53.5. THE AUTO MANUAL BUTTON..............................................................63.5.1. To Change Setpoint (when the loop is in Auto) ..........................................73.5.2. To Change Output Power (when the loop is in Manual) .............................73.6. PARAMETERS AND HOW TO ACCESS THEM ..................................83.6.1. Pages ...........................................................................................................83.7. NAVIGATION OVERVIEW......................................................................93.7.1. To Select a Page Header .............................................................................93.7.2. To Navigate to a Parameter from a Page Header. .....................................103.7.3. To Change Next Parameter in the List ......................................................113.7.4. To Change Any Parameter in the List .......................................................113.8. BACKSCROLL..........................................................................................113.9. PARAMETER VALUES...........................................................................123.9.1. Confirmation Mechanism..........................................................................133.9.2. Invalid key actions ....................................................................................133.10. PARAMETER TABLES .........................................................................143.11. DISPLAYS FOR CASCADE, RATIO AND OVERRIDE....................153.12. PARAMETER AVAILABILITY AND ALTERABILITY...................183.13. NAVIGATION DIAGRAM ……………………………………………….19
Getting Started 2704 Controller
3-2 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00
3. Chapter 3 GETTING STARTEDWith the controller installed, as described in the previous chapter, this chapter explains theprinciple of how to locate and change values of parameters using the front panel buttons.
Operation of these buttons changes the information on the display by opening different pages.Each page is associated with a particular aspect of the operation of the controller. Thenavigation between the pages follows a set order and the principle of this navigation isdescribed in this chapter.
Subsequent chapters describe the detail of each page and follow the order in which the pagesappear on the controller.
Note: The 2704 controller is an application specific controller and can be configured tothe preferences of a particular process, site or user. This means that the displays shownin this and following chapters may not be identical to those shown in your instrument.Where the text on a display is user configurable it is shown in italics, eg Loop1
About this chapter
This chapter describes:
◊ How to change setpoint
◊ The operator buttons
◊ Parameters and how to access them
◊ Pages
◊ How to step through pages
◊ How to step through parameters
◊ How to change parameter values
◊ The navigation diagram
◊ Parameter tables
2704 Controller Getting Started
Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 3-3
3.1. POWER UP
Install and wire up the controller in accordance with Chapter 2 and switch on. A short selftest sequence takes place during which the controller identification is displayed together withthe version number of software fitted.
3.1.1. The HOME PageThe controller then shows a default display, referred to as the HOME page. It is possible toconfigure the HOME page to suit the preferences of the process or the user, but the format isshown in Figure 3-1. This is also the default display on a new controller.
The HOME page will be displayed under the following conditions:-1. When the controller is switched on2. When the access mode is changed from configuration level to an operating level
3. When and are pressed together (see 3.10)4. When a timeout (if configured) occurs
The HOME page can be configured as:-1. Summary Page (see also Chapter 5)2. The Program Run page (see also Chapter 6)3. Loop Views - LP1 (as shown), LP2, LP34. The Access page (see Chapter 4)5. Cycle Each Loop. LP1 to LP3 pages are cycled in turn6. All Loops (summary of 2 or 3 loops if configured)7. LP1, LP2, LP3 Trend Charts (PV & SP for each loop)8. Program Mimic
The configuration of these displays is described in the Engineering manual, Part No.HA026933.
Figure 3-1: The 'HOME' Page (default)
OutputPVSP
Message Banner
ProgrammerStatus
Auto/Manual
Setpoint source
Loop 1
Loop 2
Loop 3
Getting Started 2704 Controller
3-4 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00
3.2. THE OPERATOR BUTTONS
Auto/Manualbutton
When pressed, this toggles between automatic andmanual mode:• If the controller is in automatic mode ‘AUT’ is displayed• If the controller is in manual mode, ‘MAN’ is displayed
See Figure 3-1
Loop selectbutton
Each press selects each loop in turn or between eachloop and the trend chart if each of the above options areconfigured plus a summary of all loops.The loop name is shown in the banner at the top of thedisplay
Programmerbutton
This buttonoperates theprogrammeron all loops
See alsoChapter 6
‘ProgrammerOperation’
• Press once to display a pop up window
The pop up window will remain for approximately 6seconds and during this period:-
• Press PROG again to RUN a program
• Press PROG again to HOLD a program
• Press PROG again to toggle between RUN & HOLD
• Press PROG and hold for two seconds to reset
Page button Press to select new pages from the page header ‘Menu’.If held down it will continuously scroll the pages.
Scroll button Press to select a new parameter from the page heading.If held down it will continuously scroll through theparameters.
Down button Press to decrease an analogue value, or to change thestate of a digital value
Up button Press to increase an analogue value, or to change thestate of a digital value
Note:- The AUTO, LOOP, or PROG may have been disabled in configuration level.
Figure 3-2: Operator Buttons
AUTO
LOOP
PROG
AUTO LOOP PROG
2704 Controller Getting Started
Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 3-5
3.3. THE PROG BUTTON
If the controller is configured as a programmer this button has three functions:
• To put the programmer into RUN mode. This causes the working setpoint to follow theprofile set in the program being used.
• To put the programmer into HOLD mode. This stops the program from running andmaintains the setpoint at the current level..
• To put the programmer into RESET mode. This resets the programmer to the controllersetpoint, the working setpoint can be changed manually using the Raise/Lower buttons.
This button operates all programmer setpoints simultaneously.
3.4. THE LOOP SELECT BUTTON
If more than one loop is configured, the Loop Select button allows you to select a summaryof each loop from whatever page is being displayed at the time. Each press of the LoopSelect button will change the display from the ‘ALL LOOPS’ view to ‘Loop 1’ summary tothe ‘Loop 1 Trend’ chart, followed by the next loop summary, and so on.
By default a loop is designated by the mnemonic ‘LP’ followed by the loop number (1, 2 or3). This is shown in the banner at the top of the display page. The default message may bereplaced by a customised name for the loop.
To return to the original page view at any time, press the page button, . Alternatively, atimeout may have been set which will return the display to the HOME page view after a setperiod. The timeout is set in configuration level, see Engineering Manual part no HA026933.
If only one loop is configured the display toggles between ‘LP1’ and ‘LP1 Trend’, (the ‘ALLLOOPS’ page is not shown).
Figure 3-3: Loop Summary and Loop Trend Chart
PressLOOP
Next LoopSummary
PressLOOP
Back to ALLLOOPS summary
Getting Started 2704 Controller
3-6 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00
3.5. THE AUTO MANUAL BUTTON
The controller has two basic modes of operation:
• Automatic Mode in which the control output is automatically adjusted to maintain theprocess value at the setpoint .
• Manual Mode in which you can adjust the output independently of the setpoint.
The Auto/Manual button can only be operated from the loop view. Press the Loop Selectbutton to select the loop view, then press AUTO/MAN to toggle between auto and manual.When the controller is in AUTO , ‘AUT’ will be displayed on the page (see Figure 3-4). Themiddle readout will default to the Working Setpoint in a standard controller.
When the controller is in MANUAL , ‘MAN’ will be displayed on the page (see Figure 3-5).The middle readout will default to Output Power in a standard controller.
If the loop summary page is not being viewed when the AUTO/MAN button is pressed, thedisplay will change to the first available loop summary. Subsequent presses will changebetween Auto and Manual for the selected loop as above.
If the output is configured as On/Off, the output will be Off when the target output < 0.9 andOn when the target output is > +1.0.
2704 Controller Getting Started
Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 3-7
3.5.1. To Change Setpoint (when the loop is in Auto)
Figure 3-4: Changing Setpoint
3.5.2. To Change Output Power (when the loop is in Manual)
Figure 3-5: Changing Output Power
Press and hold the
button toincrease the setpoint
Press and hold the
button todecrease the setpoint
A flashing bar underlines theselected parameter (setpoint)
Press and hold the
button toincrease the output
Press and hold the
button todecrease the output
A flashing bar underlines the selectedparameter (output power)
Getting Started 2704 Controller
3-8 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00
3.6. PARAMETERS AND HOW TO ACCESS THEM
Parameters are settings, within the controller, which determine how the controller will
operate. They are accessed, using the and buttons, and can be changed, to suit the
process, using the and buttons.Selected parameters may be protected under different security access levels.
Examples of parameters are:-Values - such as setpoints, alarm trip levels, high and low limits, etc.,orStates - such as auto/manual, on/off, etc. These are often referred to as enumerated values.
3.6.1. PagesThe parameters are organised into different pages. A page shows information such as pageheaders, parameter names and parameter values.
Parameters are grouped in accordance with the function they perform. Each group is given a‘Page Header’ which is a generic description of the parameter group. Examples are ‘TheAlarm Page’, ‘The Programmer Page’, etc,. A complete list of these is shown in the fullnavigation diagram, Section 3.13.
Where a function has many parameters associated with it, the Page Header may be further subdivided into ‘Sub-Headers’. The parameters are then found under this category.
Figure 3-6: Page TypesIt is possible to configure different start up pages as the Home page, but the principle ofnavigation is the same for all pages.
Note:-A page only appears on the controller if the function has been ordered and has beenenabled in Configuration mode. For example, if a programmer is not configured theRUN page and the EDIT PROGRAM pages will not be displayed.
Parameters
Sub- Header
Page HeaderPress tomove to a ‘lower’level
Press toreturn to a‘higher’ level
2704 Controller Getting Started
Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 3-9
3.7. NAVIGATION OVERVIEW
3.7.1. To Select a Page Header
Do This This Is The Display You ShouldSee
Additional Notes
The vertical bar on the rightof the display indicates theposition of the page header.
When the vertical barreaches the centre of thescreen the text moves up.
This feature allows you tosee previous andfollowing page headernames.
When the last name inthe Page Header listappears at the bottom ofthe display, the verticalbar and the highlightedtext will continue movedownwards.
The sequence is repeatedfollowing further presses of
button
2. Press to scrolldown the list of pageheaders.
3. Press to scrollback up the list ofpage headers.
1. From any display
press as manytimes as necessary toaccess the pageheader menu
Getting Started 2704 Controller
3-10 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00
3.7.2. To Navigate to a Parameter from a Page Header.
Do This This Is The Display You ShouldSee
Additional Notes
3. Press to selectthe list of Page Sub-Headers for thehighlighted Page Header.
4. Press or toscroll up or down the listof page sub-headers
5. Press to select thelist of Parameters in thehighlighted sub-header.
6. Press or toscroll up or down the list ofparameters.
7. Press to selectthe parameter which youwish to change
8. Press or tochange the value
1. From any page press
as many times asnecessary to select thelist of Page Headers
2. Press or toscroll up or down the listof page headers.
The symbol indicatesthat the page header isfollowed by a list of sub-headers.
If a page does notcontain a Sub-Headerthe display goes directlyto 5 below
A flashing bar underlinesthe selected parameter.
The parameter can onlybe altered if the value ispreceded by !!
If the value is read only itwill be replaced by ‘- -‘for as long as the raise orlower buttons arepressed
Press to return to Page Header
Press to return to Sub- Header
Press to return
2704 Controller Getting Started
Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 3-11
3.7.3. To Change Next Parameter in the ListThis sections describes how to select further parameters in the list which you may wish toalter or to view.
Do This This Is The Display You ShouldSee
Additional Notes
3.7.4. To Change Any Parameter in the List
As stated above you can keep pressing or hold down the button to continuously scrollaround the list of parameters. There are two other alternatives. The first is to return to thehighlight bar, described below. The second is ‘Backscroll’ described in the next section.
Do This This Is The Display You ShouldSee
Additional Notes
3.8. BACKSCROLL
In some cases it may be more convenient to scroll back up the list, for example, to select anew segment number when setting up a program.
A short cut is provided by holding down and pressing or .
Each press of will step back to the previous parameter. Each press of will stepforward to the next parameter.
This function is provided as a short cut and is not necessary to navigate through theparameters.
The button will allowyou to scroll down the list.
If this button is held downit will continuously scrollaround the list, which willenable you to change aprevious parameter.
1. From the previous
display, press toselect the next parameterwhich you wish tochange
2. Press or tochange the value
1. From the previous
display, press tohighlight the parametervalue and its name.
2. Press or toscroll up or down the list.
Getting Started 2704 Controller
3-12 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00
3.9. PARAMETER VALUES
Parameter values can be displayed in different ways depending upon the parameter type. Thedifferent types of parameter, and how their values are changed, are shown below.
1. Numerical Values (eg Full Scale High Alarm Setpoint)
2. Enumerated Values (eg PV Input Alarm Acknowledge)
3. Digital Values (e.g. programmer event outputs)
4. Parameter Addresses (eg PV Src )
Note:- This example is only available in configuration level, but is included here to illustratethe principle of operation.
Press to increase the value
Press to decrease the value
FS Hi Setpoint !200
Press to show next state
Press to show previous state
PV Alm Ack !No
Press to step along the values. A cursor underthe selected value flashes.
Press or to turn the value on or off
Prog Reset DO ! æ
Press or to change the parameter address byscrolling through a list of the most popular mnemonics.A cursor under the parameter mnemonic flashes.
Press or to change the Parameter address .A cursor under the parameter address flashes.
The parameter name for that address (if it exists) isshown to the right of the Modbus address.
Press to change from parameter address to parameter mnemonic
PV Src !05108:PVIn.Val
PV Src !05108:PVIn.Val
2704 Controller Getting Started
Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 3-13
5. Text (eg Program Name - User definable)
6. Time (eg Programmer Segment Duration)
Figure 3-7: Changing Parameter Values for Different Parameter Types
3.9.1. Confirmation Mechanism
Having changed a value, when the or key is released, the display will blink after aperiod of 1.5 seconds, indicating that the new parameter value has been accepted. If anyother key is pressed during the 1.5 second period the parameter value is acceptedimmediately.
There are exceptions for specific parameters. Examples of these are:-
Output Power adjustment when in Manual mode. The value is written continuously as thevalue is changed.
Alarm Acknowledge. If the Alarm Acknowledge is changed from ‘No’ to ‘Acknowledge’ a
confirmation message appears. Press key to confirm the change. If no key is pressed for10 seconds the value is restored to its previous value.
3.9.2. Invalid key actionsAt any time some state transitions may be invalid, due, for example, to contention with digitalinputs or to the current operating state of the instrument.Examples are:-1. Digital inputs have priority over the operator buttons.
2. If a parameter value cannot be changed the ! prompt is not shown
3. If the or button is pressed for a read only parameter a number of dashes, ----, isdisplayed.
Press or to increase or decrease the time setting.This is an accelerating display.
Seg Duration !0:01:00
Program Name !Program 1 Press or to change the character
Press to change to the next character
Program Name !Program 1 Press or to change the character. Up to 16characters can be altered.
Getting Started 2704 Controller
3-14 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00
3.10. PARAMETER TABLES
Subsequent chapters in this manual refer to parameter tables. These tables provide the fulllist of parameters available at Access Level 3 in a particular page. The table below is anexample.
Column 1 gives the name of the parameter as it appears on the display.Column 2 is a description and possible usage of the parameterColumn 3 is the range of values which can be set. . This may be a numerical value, eg -n
to +n, or the condition (enumeration) of a parameter, eg the parameter ‘ProgramStatus’ has enumerations ‘Run’, ‘Hold’, ‘Reset’.
Column 4 is the default value (if applicable) of the parameter set during manufactureColumn 5 is the access level required to change the parameter value.
L1 means that the value is only shown in Level 1L2 means that the value is only shown in Level 1 and Level 2L3 means that the value is always available in the instrument operating mode(i.e. not Configuration Level)R/O is Read OnlyAccess Levels are described in Chapter 4.For Configuration Level access see 2704 Engineering Manual, Part Number HA026933
Table Number: Description of the page PageHeader
1
Parameter Name
2
Parameter Description
3
Value
4
Default
5
AccessLevel
Program Number The number of the selected program L3
Segment Number The currently running segmentnumber
L3
PSP1 Type Program Setpoint 1 type L3
PSP1 Working SP Program Setpoint 1 working setpoint L3
PSP1 Target Program Setpoint 1 target setpoint L3
PSP1 Dwell Time Program Setpoint 1 dwell time L3
This is a continuous loop which returns to the list header
Note:-A parameter only appears if it is relevant to the configuration of the controller. Forexample, a programmer configured as Time to Target will not display the Rateparameter.
2704 Controller Getting Started
Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 3-15
3.11. DISPLAYS FOR CASCADE, RATIO AND OVERRIDE
The Loop Summary, displayed in previous views in this chapter, shows a controllerconfigured as ‘Single’ loop. The Loop Summary view, for controllers configured as cascade,ratio, override or valve position varies as shown in this section.For more information on these methods of control see Chapter 9.
Figure 3-8: Cascade Loop View
Master PV
Master SP
Slave PVSlave SP
This line may show different parameters
Press to show alternatives. The defaults are:
Target Setpoint The main SP Press
Target OP Output demand
VPos Valve position (VP controlleronly)
or
Local SP Local (Slave) setpoint
Disable CSD Allows cascade to be turned offeg for commissioning purposes
to adjustthe value.
Note:
1. The parameter displayed first depends upon other settings.For example; if controller is in Auto the Target SP is displayedfirst; if the controller is in Manual the Target OP is displayedfirst.
2. In configuration level it is possible to hide or make individualparameters read only.
Target Output Power
Getting Started 2704 Controller
3-16 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00
Figure 3-9: Override Loop View
Main PV
Main SP
Override PVOverride SP
This line may show different parameters
Press to show alternatives. The defaults are:
Target SP The main setpoint Press
Target OP Output demand
VPos Valve position (VP controlleronly)
OvrSP Override setpoint . or
Disable OVR Allows override to be turned offeg for commissioning purposes
Active Loop Displays the active loop - Mainor Override
Main OP Reads the output demand forthe main loop
to adjust
Override OP Reads the output demand forthe override loop
thevalue
Note:
1. The parameter displayed first depends upon other settings.For example; if controller is in Auto the Target SP isdisplayed first; if the controller is in Manual the Target OP isdisplayed first.
2. In configuration level it is possible to hide or make individualparameters read only.
Working Output Power (from the active loop)
2704 Controller Getting Started
Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 3-17
Figure 3-10: Ratio Loop View
Measured ratioRatio SP
Main Loop PV
Main Loop SP
This line may show different parameters
Press to show alternatives. The defaults are:
Target SP The main setpoint Press
Target OP Output demand
VPos Valve position (VP controlleronly)
. or
Ratio SP Ratio setpoint
Enable Ratio Allows ratio to be turned on egfor commissioning purposes
to adjust
Ratio Trim Applies a trim to the ratio SP thevalue
Lead PV The measured flow 1
Note:
1. The parameter displayed first depends upon other settings.For example; if controller is in Auto the Target SP isdisplayed first; if the controller is in Manual the Target OP isdisplayed first.
2. In configuration level it is possible to hide or make individualparameters read only.
Working Output Demand
Getting Started 2704 Controller
3-18 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00
3.12. PARAMETER AVAILABILITY AND ALTERABILITY
A parameter which appears on a page is described as available. Parameters are not availableif they are not appropriate for a particular configuration or instrument status. For example,relative cool gain does not appear in a heat only controller, and integral time does not appearin an On/Off controller.
A parameter described as alterable is preceded by the ! symbol which indicates that its valuecan be changed. A parameter which is not alterable may be viewed (subject to availability),but may be changed by an instrument algorithm.
A parameter is alterable only if the following conditions are satisfied:-
• The parameter is READ/WRITE• The parameter does not conflict with the status of the instrument. For example, the
proportional band will not be alterable if autotune is active• The instrument keys must be enabled. Keys can be disabled by a logic input, turned off
in configuration level or via digital communications. A logic input can be configured todisable front panel keys; this will not remove remote control of the user interface viadigital communications.
The Navigation Diagram which follows shows all pages which are available at Level 3. For aparticular configuration not all pages are displayed on the controller. For example:-the programmer pages do not appear if a programmer is not configured; the Loop 2 and 3 setup pages do not appear for a single loop controller.
Any one or all of the pages shown in the navigation diagram can also be displayed at Level 1& 2. This, however, will have been pre-set in Configuration Level (see 2704 EngineeringManual Part No HA026933).
2704 Controller Getting Started
Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 3-19
3-20 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr -00
3.12 NAVIGATION DIAGRAM
PROGRAM RUN
Selectusing
or
Parameters forAccess
See Chapter 4
Parameters forProgram RunSee Chapter 6
PROGRAM MIMIC
GeneralPSP1PSP2PSP3
PROGRAM EDIT
Parameters forProgram Edit
See Chapter 6
OptionsWiringProgramSegment
INSTRUMENT
Parameters forInstrument
See Eng. ManualHA026933
OptionsUnitsDisplayPage PromUser TextSummaryStandby
SUMMARY
Selectusing
or
Selectusing
or
Parameters forSummary
See Chapter 5
Go ToHumidity
Notes:
1. Page headers shown shaded are only available in Config and View Config level 2. Text shown in italics is user configurable in configuration mode and may be
different from that shown
ALARMS
Parameters forAlarms
See Chapter 7
SummaryLP1 (to 3)PV InputAN InputModule 1 (to 6)User 1 (to 8)
Selectusing
or
AUTOTUNE
Parameters forAutotune
See Chapter 8
LP 1 SETUP
Parameters forLP 1 Setup
See Chapter 9
OptionsWiringSPSP (Aux)CascadeRatioOverridePIDPID (Aux)MotorOutputDiagnosticDisplayDisplay (Aux)Load Sim
Selectusing
or
LP 2 SETUP
Parameters for Loop 2 and Loop 3 Set upSee Chapter 9
LP 3 SETUP
Parameters forDigital ProgramSee Chapter 6A
Dig Prog 1Dig Prog 2Dig Prog 3Dig Prog 4Edit Program
Selectusing
or
DIGITAL PROG
OptionsWiring
Parameters forZirconia ProbeSee Chapter 10
ZIRCONIA PROBE
1000
S01/041372
-200
Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr -00 3-21
Figure 3-11: Navigation Diagram
Return to‘Access’
TIMER BLOCKS
Selectusing
or
Parameters forTimer Blocks
See Chapter 12
Timer 1 (to 4)ClockAlarm 1 (&2)Totaliser 1 (to 4)
Parameters forInput OperatorsSee Chapter 11
Cust Lin 1Cust Lin 2Cust Lin 3Switch 1Monitor 1BCD Input
Selectusing
or
INPUT OPERS
Parameters forHumidity
See Chapter 10
HUMIDITY
OptionsWiring
USER VALUES
Parameters forUser Values
See Chapter 13
User Val 1toUser Val 12
ANALOGUE OPERS
Parameters forAnalogue OpersSee Chapter 14
An. 1toAn. 24
Selectusing
or
Selectusing
or
DIAGNOSTICS
Parameters forDiagnostics
See Chapter 20
PATTERN GEN USER MESSAGES
Parameters forPattern Gen
See Chapter 13
Dig Group 1Dig Group 2
Parameters forUser MessagesSee Chapter 13
Msg 1toMsg 8
Selectusing
or
Selectusing
or
COMMS
Selectusing
or
Parameters forCommunicationsSee Chapter 16
H ModuleJ ModuleDiagnostics
STANDARD IO
Selectusing
or
Parameters forStandard IO
See Chapter 17
PV InputAN InputAA RelayDig IO1 (to 7)Diagnostic
MODULE IO
Selectusing
or
Parameters forModule IO
See Chapter 18
IdentsModule 1AModule 1BModule 1C
LOGIC OPERS
Parameters forLogic OperatorsSee Chapter 15
Logic 1toLogic 32
Selectusing
or
IO EXPANDER
Parameters forDIO Expander
See Chapter 20
TXDCR SCALING
Selectusing
or
Parameters forTransducer
ScalingSee Chapter 19
Txdcr1Txdcr2Txdcr3
Press to scroll toprevious headers
Getting Started 2704 Controller
3-22 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00
2704 Controller Access Levels
Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 4-1
4. CHAPTER 4 ACCESS LEVELS ......................................... 24.1. THE DIFFERENT ACCESS LEVELS ......................................................24.2. PASSCODES................................................................................................24.3. TO SELECT AN ACCESS LEVEL ...........................................................3
Access Levels 2704 Controller
4-2 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00
4. Chapter 4 ACCESS LEVELSParameters are protected under five different levels of access for which security codes may benecessary. This chapter describes the different levels of access to the operating parametersavailable in the controller.
4.1. THE DIFFERENT ACCESS LEVELS
Access Level What you can do PasswordProtection
Level 1 This is sometimes referred to as Operator Level since it allowsoperators to view and adjust parameters within limits set inhigher levels. Any page available in levels 2 or 3 may beconfigured to appear in level 1. This is done from theconfiguration level using the page promote feature, seeEngineering Manual HA026933
No
Level 2 This is sometimes referred to as Supervisor level since all theparameters relevant to a particular configuration are visible. Allalterable parameters can be adjusted.
Yes
Level 3 These are parameters which are generally required whencommissioning the controller. Any page at this level can alsobe configured to appear at Level 2.
Yes
Config This special level allows access to configure the fundamentalcharacteristics of the controller and is not included in thisoperating handbook.
For configuration details see 2704 Engineering Manual Part noHA026933
Yes
View Config This is a read only level which allows you to view theconfiguration of the controller. It is not possible to changeparameter values in this level. It is not possible to readpasscodes in this level.
Yes
4.2. PASSCODES
On switch on the controller defaults to Level 1 which is not protected by a passcode. Alimited set of parameters can be changed in this level. The parameter tables in each chapterlist those parameters which can be changed.
Level 2, level 3 and Configuration level are protected by passcodes. The default passcodesset in a new controller are:
Level 2 Passcode ‘2’Level 3 Passcode ‘3’View Config Passcode 2704
These passcodes can only be changed in configuration level.See Engineering Manual HA026933.
2704 Controller Access Levels
Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 4-3
If a passcode of ‘None’ has been entered for any level it will not be necessary to enter apasscode to enter that level.
The levels of access covered by this manual are Levels 1, 2, 3 and View Config. In any ofthese levels the controller continues to monitor and control the process to which it isconnected. This allows parameter values to be altered to suit the operating conditions of theprocess.Configuration of the controller allows the fundamental characteristics of the controller to bechanged and for this reason it enters a standby state in which all outputs are frozen. In thiscondition the instrument no longer controls the process to which it is connected.
4.3. TO SELECT AN ACCESS LEVELDo This This Is The Display You
Should SeeAdditional Notes
This is the page headerwhich contains theaccess levels
3. Press to select theaccess level parameters
The default passcode of anew controller is 3 toenter level 3. If a newpasscode has beenentered in Config levelthis will be in the form 0 to9999.
If an incorrect passcodeis entered, the displayreturns to !0.
Note:In the special case thatthe passcode has beenconfigured as None, thedisplay will blinkmomentarily when level 3is selected and level 3 willbe entered immediately
4. Press or toselect the required accesslevel. E.g. Level 3
5. Press or toenter the passcode.
When the correctpasscode is entered thedisplay momentarilychanges to !PASS, thenback to the start level toconfirm correct entry.
To go from a higher level to a lower level does not require entry of a passcode.
1. From any display press
to return to the pageheader menu.
2. Press or toselect ‘ACCESS’
Access Levels 2704 Controller
4-4 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00
2704 Controller The Summary Page
Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 5-1
5. CHAPTER 5 THE SUMMARY PAGE.................................. 25.1. WHAT IS THE SUMMARY PAGE...........................................................25.1.1. To Select The Summary Page .....................................................................2
The Summary Page 2704 Controller
5-2 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00
5. Chapter 5 THE SUMMARY PAGE
5.1. WHAT IS THE SUMMARY PAGE
The Summary Page is a customised page which allows you to view and alter up to 10parameters in common use in your particular application. It is only available if it has beencustomised and turned on in configuration level.
The summary page may be promoted (in configuration level) to be the HOME page. If thesummary page is the HOME page it is shown under the following conditions:-
1. When the controller is switched on2. When the access mode is changed from configuration level to a different level
3. When and are pressed together (see 3.9)4. When a timeout (if configured) occurs
5.1.1. To Select The Summary Page
Do This This Is The Display YouShould See
Reason
3. Press to view up toten parameters which havebeen pre-defined inconfiguration level
This view shows fiveparameters:PV Loop 1The value of Dig 1 inputThe value of Dig 2 inputProgram SP 1Program Dig 1 Output
Note: If the Summarypage has not beenenabled in configurationlevel, the ‘SUMMARY’page header is notdisplayed
1. From any display press
to return to the pageheader menu.
2. Press or toselect ‘SUMMARY’
2704 Controller Programmer Operation
Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 6-1
6. CHAPTER 6 PROGRAMMER OPERATION ...................... 26.1.1. Customisable Parameter Names..................................................................26.2. WHAT IS SETPOINT PROGRAMMING ?.............................................36.3. THE 2704 SETPOINT PROGRAMMER DEFINITIONS.......................46.3.1. Run..............................................................................................................46.3.2. Hold ............................................................................................................46.3.3. Reset............................................................................................................46.3.4. Servo ...........................................................................................................46.3.5. Hot Start ......................................................................................................46.3.6. Power Fail Recovery ...................................................................................56.3.7. Wait.............................................................................................................66.3.8. Holdback (Guaranteed Soak) ......................................................................76.3.9. Digital Inputs...............................................................................................86.3.10. Program User Values ................................................................................86.4. PROGRAMMER TYPES ...........................................................................96.4.1. Time To Target Programmer ......................................................................96.4.2.Ramp Rate Programmer ...............................................................................96.4.3. Segment Types............................................................................................96.5. PROGRAMMER PAGES.........................................................................116.5.1. To Access the Program Trend Screen.......................................................116.5.2. Parameters Available on the Programmer Mimic Screen..........................126.6. TO RUN, HOLD OR RESET A PROGRAM..........................................136.6.1. From the ‘PROG’ Button ..........................................................................136.6.2. From Digital Inputs ...................................................................................136.6.3. From Digital Communications ..................................................................136.6.4. From the Programmer Run Parameters Page ............................................146.6.5. Run Parameter Tables ...............................................................................156.7. TO CREATE OR EDIT A PROGRAM...................................................176.7.1. To Access the Program Edit pages............................................................176.7.2. PROGRAM EDIT (Program Page) Parameters ........................................186.7.3. To Set Up Each Segment of a Program.....................................................206.7.4. PROGRAM EDIT (Segment) Parameters.................................................216.8. EXAMPLES ...............................................................................................246.8.1. To Enter a Program in a Ramp Rate Programmer.....................................246.8.2. To Enter a Program in a Time to Target Programmer...............................286.8.3. To Apply Holdback...................................................................................296.8.4. To Apply Wait ..........................................................................................316.8.5. To Display Wait Status in Run Mode .......................................................326.8.6. To Set Up Program Names .......................................................................336.8.7. To Set Up Segment Names .......................................................................34
Programmer Operation 2704 Controller
6-2 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00
6. Chapter 6 PROGRAMMER OPERATIONThis chapter explains Setpoint Programming and how to Create, Edit and Run programs.Parameters which are associated with setpoint program operation are also listed in tables as ageneral reference.
Note: The 2704 controller is an application specific controller and can be configured tothe preferences of a particular process, site or even user. This means that the displaysshown in this and following chapters may not be identical to those shown in yourinstrument. Displays shown in italics are user definable and may, therefore, varybetween instruments.
About this Chapter
This chapter describes:
◊ The meaning of setpoint programs
◊ Setpoint programming terminology
◊ Programmer types
◊ How to run, hold or reset a program
◊ How to create or edit a program
◊ Examples of how to set up specific features of a program
6.1.1. Customisable Parameter Names
Throughout this chapter parameter names shown in italics are customisable by the userwhen in configuration access level. The name of the parameter may vary, therefore,from instrument to instrument.Typical customisable parameter names are:
Program namesProfile Setpoint namesSegment names
2704 Controller Programmer Operation
Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 6-3
6.2. WHAT IS SETPOINT PROGRAMMING ?
Many applications need to vary the process value over time. Such applications need acontroller which varies a setpoint as a function of time. The 2704 controller will program upto three separate profiles. These may be temperature, pressure, light level, humidity, etc.,depending on the application, and are referred to as Profiled Setpoints (PSPs). A setpointprogram containing three profile setpoints is shown in Figure 6-1.
The Program is divided into a flexible number of Segments - each being a single timeduration, - and containing details for each profiled setpoint. The total number of segmentsavailable is 100 per program with a maximum of 500.A controller containing functionality to control profile setpoints against time is referred to asa Programmer. The 2704 programmer works on a single timebase for all programs.
Figure 6-1: A Setpoint Program
The profiled setpoints may be used as either control loop setpoints or independentparameters for retransmission or use in derived calculations.The 2704 may store up to 20 programs as standard, with up to 50 if purchased.
Segment
ProfileSetpoint1
ProfileSetpoint 2
ProfileSetpoint 3
Start (Run) 2h1h 3h 4h 5h 6h 7h 8h Time
Program
2
1
16 X Digital Events
PV
Segment 1Target
Segment 1Time
Programmer Operation 2704 Controller
6-4 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00
6.3. THE 2704 SETPOINT PROGRAMMER DEFINITIONS
6.3.1. RunIn run the programmer varies the setpoint in accordance with the profile set in the activeprogram.
6.3.2. HoldIn hold the programmer is frozen at its current point. In this state you can make temporarychanges to program parameters such as a target setpoint, ramp rates and dwells (ifprogrammer configured for ramp rate) or segment duration (if programmer configured asTime to Target). Such changes will only remain effective until the end of the currentlyrunning segment, when they will be overwritten by the stored program values.
6.3.3. ResetIn reset the programmer is inactive and the controller behaves as a standard controller, withthe setpoint determined by the raise/lower buttons.
6.3.4. ServoWhen a program is run the setpoint can start from the initial controller setpoint or from thecurrent process value. Whichever it is the starting point is called the servo point. This can beset in the program.The usual method is to servo to the process value because this will produce a smooth andbumpless start to the process.If, however, when using a Ramp Rate programmer, it is essential to guarantee the time periodof the first segment it may be better to set the controller to servo to setpoint. (Note: in aTime to Target programmer the segment duration will always be determined by the setting ofthe Segment Duration parameter.)
6.3.5. Hot StartHot start can occur in any segment type, for any PSP but is most useful to ramp segments.When run is initiated it allows the program to automatically advance to the correct point inthe profile which corresponds to the operating value of the process. Hot start is enabled inconfiguration level and specifies which programmed variable to use when deciding thecorrect segment.
2704 Controller Programmer Operation
Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 6-5
6.3.6. Power Fail RecoveryIn the event of power fail to the controller, a strategy may be set in configuration level, whichdefines how the controller behaves on restoration of the power. These strategies include:
Continue The program runs from the last setpoint. This may cause fullpower to be applied to the process for a short period to heat theprocess back to its value prior to the power failure
Ramp back This will ramp the process value back to its original value at acontrolled rate. This will be the last encountered rate.
Reset The process is aborted by resetting the programHold Program The programmer will enter the HOLD state. The operator may
then change the state to Reset or Run. On exiting from Holdinto Run the program will continue, it will not ramp back.
Test Time This option makes use of the real time clock in the controller todetermine how long the power has been off. Two time periodscan be set which allows three strategies:
1. If the power is off for less than the first period, theprogrammer will continue from its last operating point
2. If the power is off for a time between the two timeboundaries, the controller will servo to the PV and rampback to the operating point using the previous ramp rate.
3. If the power is off for longer than the second time boundary,the programmer will reset.
Note:
The programmer takes about 25 seconds to start running afterpower is applied to the 2700. This delay should be taken intoconsideration when setting up the Test Time recovery parameter.
Programmer Operation 2704 Controller
6-6 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00
6.3.7. WaitThree wait conditions are provided at the end of each segment which may be wired, inconfiguration level, using a ‘Toolkit Block’ expression or by a digital input. Each segmentmay then select No-Wait, Wait on Event A, Wait on Event B or Wait on Event C. When allprofile segments are complete, and the configured wait event is active, the program waitsuntil the wait event becomes in-active before progressing to the next segment.
Figure 6-2: Wait Events
See Section 6.7.4. for a description of operation.
Event OP
Event OP
Event Aor digitalinput
Event Bor digitalinput
WaitA
WaitB
WaitC
Programmer
Segment 1 Segment 2 Segment 3
Wait = Wait onEvent A
Wait = OFF
Wait = Wait onEvent B
Segment 1 extendedby the wait period
Segment 3 extendedby the wait period
2704 Controller Programmer Operation
Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 6-7
6.3.8. Holdback (Guaranteed Soak)
Holdback freezes the program if the process value does not track the setpoint by an amountwhich can be set by the user. It may operate in any PSP type.In a Ramp it indicates that the process value is lagging the setpoint by more than a pre-setamount and that the program is waiting for the process to catch up.In a Dwell it will freeze the dwell time if the difference between SP and PV exceeds pre-setlimits.In both cases it guarantees the correct soak period for the product. See also section 6.7.2.Holdback may be configured in three modes:• OFF - holdback does not operate• Applied to the complete program. Holdback operates the same way in every segment• To each individual segment. A different holdback type can be applied to each segment
Holdback Type defines how holdback operates. It may apply when:• The PV is below the SP by a pre-set value (Lo),• The PV is above the SP by a pre-set value(Hi)• The PV is below or above the SP by a pre-set value (Band).
In addition two levels of holdback are available per profile setpoint, per program. These aredefined as ‘Fine’ and ‘Course’.
Example:Holdback, operating in each segment, is often used in a temperature control application asdetailed below:-
During a ramp up period the holdback type may be set to deviation low. If the Process Valuelags the programmed rate of rise, holdback will stop the program until the PV catches up.This prevents the set program from entering the next segment until the PV has attained thecorrect temperature.
During a dwell period the holdback type may be set to deviation band. This guarantees thatthe dwell or soak period operates only when the process value is within both high and lowdeviation limits.
During a ramp down period the holdback type may be set to deviation high. If the processcannot cool at the rate set by the ramp down rate the program will be held until the processcatches up.
When a profile is placed into holdback the other profiles are (normally) not held. Theycontinue and rendezvous at the end of the segment.
Each segment may consist of up to three profiles. Two levels of holdback value, course andfine, may be applied for each profile of each segment in the PROGRAM EDIT Program page.
Programmer Operation 2704 Controller
6-8 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00
6.3.9. Digital InputsDigital inputs are available on the controller which can be configured for the followingprogrammer functions:
Run Allows the program to be run from an external source such as apushbutton or other event. The Run input is edge triggered.
Hold Allows the program to be held from an external source such as apushbutton or other event. The Hold input is level triggered.
Reset Allows the program to be reset from an external source such as apushbutton or other event. The Reset input is level triggered.
Run/Hold Allows the program to be run or held from a single external inputsource
Run/Reset Allows the program to be run or reset from a single external inputsource
Advance Segment Selects the next segment from an external input sourceAdvance Program Selects the next program from an external input source. When this
event occurs, the controller display will change to programmerview. Subsequent changes of this input source will cause theprogram number to increment.
Holdback disabled Disables holdback from an external input source
For more information on digital inputs refer to Chapters 17 and 18. For configuration ofthese inputs see Engineering Manual Part No. HA026933.
6.3.10. Program User ValuesProgram User Values provide multiplexor facilities for the user. Each user value providesstorage for a number of event values (currently 100). Each user value will normally be wired(in software) to call up another feature.
The following example shows how the programmer user values may be used to call updifferent sets of pre-configured digital output values for different segments in a programmer.This would make use of the Pattern Generator described in Chapter 13, and assumes that anuser value has been wired to a Pattern Generator.
Program Segment 1 Program Segment 2 Program Segment 3 Program Segment xUser Value 1Value 1
User Value 1Value 6
User Value 1Value 11
User Value 1Value 15
Pattern Generatoroutput 1
Pattern Generatoroutput 6
Pattern Generatoroutput 11
Pattern Generatoroutput 15
In each segment a different pattern of digital outputs is set up from the single value set in theUser Value for each segment.
2704 Controller Programmer Operation
Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 6-9
6.4. PROGRAMMER TYPES
The programmer can be configured as Time to Target or Ramp Rate. A time to targetprogrammer requires fewer settings and is simple to use since all segments are the same. Atime to target programmer can, in general contain more segments than a ramp rate.
6.4.1. Time To Target ProgrammerEach segment consists of a single duration parameter and a set of target values for theprofiled variables.1. The duration specifies the time that the segment takes to change the profiled variables
from their current values to the new targets.2. A dwell type segment is set up by leaving the target setpoint at the previous value.3. A Step type segment is set up by setting the segment time to zero.
6.4.2. Ramp Rate ProgrammerEach segment can be specified by the operator as Ramp Rate, Dwell or Step.1. Each profiled setpoint must complete its segment before the programmer will move to the
next segment. If one ramp reaches its target setpoint ahead of the other variables, it willdwell at that value until the other variables have completed. The program will then moveto the next segment.
2. The duration parameter for a segment is read only. In this case the dwell period can bechanged when the program is in Hold..
3. The duration is determined by the longest profile setting.
6.4.3. Segment TypesA segment type can be defined as Profile, Go Back or End.
6.4.3.1. Profile
A profile segment may be set as:-
Ramp The setpoint ramps linearly , from its current value to a newvalue, either at a set rate (called ramp-rate programming), or in aset time (called time-to-target programming). You must specifythe ramp rate or the ramp time, and the target setpoint, whencreating or modifying a program.
Dwell The setpoint remains constant for a specified period at thespecified target. When creating programs the target is inheritedfrom the previous segment. When editing an existing program itis necessary to re-enter the target value. This allows the dwelltarget to be matched to a go-back segment.
Step The setpoint steps instantaneously from its current value to anew value at the beginning of a segment.
Programmer Operation 2704 Controller
6-10 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00
6.4.3.2. Go Back Segment
Go Back allows segments in a program to be repeated by a set number of times. It is theequivalent of inserting ‘sub-programs’ on some controllers. Figure 6-2 shows an example ofa program which is required to repeat the same section a number of times and then continuethe program.A Go Back segment is used to save the total number of segments required in a program andto simplify setting up. When planning a program it is advisable to ensure that the end andstart setpoints of the program are the same otherwise it will step to the different levels. A GoBack segment. is defined when editing a program, see section 6.7.4.
Figure 6-3: An Example of a Program with Repeating Section
6.4.3.3. End Segment
The last segment in a program is normally defined as an End segmentThe program either ends, repeats or resets in this segment. You specify which is the casewhen you create, or modify, the program. When the program ends, the programmer is putinto either, a continuous dwell state with all outputs staying unchanged, or the reset state.
Segment 1 Segment 2 Segment 7Segments 3 to 6
At this point Go Back to segment 3
Segment 6 isdefined as a GoBack segment
This section is repeated ‘n’ times
2704 Controller Programmer Operation
Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 6-11
6.5. PROGRAMMER PAGES
There are three pages associated with Programmer Operation. These are:-
1. PROGRAM MIMIC. This shows a trend plot of a running program
2. PROGRAM RUN. This shows a list of parameters associated with a running program
3. PROGRAM EDIT. This allows programs to be set up and edited
The Navigation Diagram, section 3.12, shows where these screens are found.
6.5.1. To Access the Program Trend Screen
Do This This Is The Display YouShould See
Additional Notes
The mimic plots theworking SP for each PSPconfigured.
3. Press to display themimic view.
The full list of parameters is shown in the following table
5. Parameters are shown atthe bottom of the screenwhich show the segmentvalues.
Press to select eachparameter in turn.
The value of a parameterprefixed by ! can be
changed using or
1. From any display press
to access the pageheader menu.
2. Press or toselect ‘PROGRAMMIMIC’
600
S01/041372
-200
CurrentTime
CurrentSP
ControllerRange
Segment No/Totalnumber of segments -Customised Name
Prog No: Customised NameProg No: Customised Name
Prog No:Customised Name
Programmer Operation 2704 Controller
6-12 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00
6.5.2. Parameters Available on the Programmer Mimic Screen
Table Number:
6.4.2
These parameters are available on theProgrammer Mimic screen
PROGRAM MIMIC
Parameter Name Parameter Description Value Default AccessLevel
Seg Time Rem Segment time remaining h: m: s L1 R/O
PSP1 Target PSP1 target setpoint for thecurrent segment
Displayrange
L1 R/O
PSP1 Dwell Tm Remaining dwell time forPSP1
h: m: s L1 R/O
PSP1 Rate PSP1 ramp rate 0.01 todisplayrange
L1 R/O
PSP2 Target PSP2 target setpoint for thecurrent segment
Displayrange
L1 R/O
PSP2 Dwell Tm Remaining dwell time forPSP2
h: m: s L1 R/O
PSP2 Rate PSP2 ramp rate 0.01 todisplayrange
L1 R/O
PSP3 Target PSP3 target setpoint for thecurrent segment
Displayrange
L1 R/O
PSP3 Dwell Tm Remaining dwell time forPSP3
h: m: s L1 R/O
PSP3 Rate PSP3 ramp rate 0.01 todisplayrange
L1 R/O
Digital Outputs Shows the state of eachdigital output configured
æ
= Off
æ = On
L1 R/O
2704 Controller Programmer Operation
Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 6-13
6.6. TO RUN, HOLD OR RESET A PROGRAM
There are four ways to control the status of a program as follows:
6.6.1. From the ‘PROG’ Button
6.6.1.1. To Run a Program
If the program is in Reset mode, press the ‘PROG’ button once. A pop up window isdisplayed:
Press the PROG button again to select ‘Run’
The symbol in the top left of the display changes to
6.6.1.2. To Hold a Program
A program can only be held from Run mode. Press the ‘PROG’ button once. The pop upwindow is again displayed showing ‘Run’. Press the ‘PROG’ button again. The message inthe pop up window changes to ‘Hold’ .
The symbol in the top left of the display changes to.
6.6.1.3. To Reset a Program
Press the ‘PROG’ button once. The pop up window is again displayed showing ‘Run’ or‘Hold’. Press the ‘PROG’ button again and hold it pressed for 2 seconds. The messagechanges to ‘Reset’.
The symbol in the top left of the display changes to
6.6.2. From Digital InputsIf digital inputs have been configured and wired for an external RUN, HOLD or RESET,activate the relevant digital input. This will normally be activated from an external switch.
6.6.3. From Digital CommunicationsIf a PC running SCADA package or iTools is connected to the controller via the digitalcommunications module, the programmer status may be changed from this package.
Programmer Operation 2704 Controller
6-14 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00
6.6.4. From the Programmer Run Parameters Page
To Run, Hold or Reset a program from the Programmer Run page:-
Do This This Is The Display YouShould See
Additional Notes
1. From any display press
to access the pageheader menu.
2. Press or toselect ‘PROGRAM RUN’
3. Press to show sub-headers
4. Press or (ifnecessary) to select‘General’
Warning!Fast run allows the program to be tested by quickly runningthrough the program segments. If the controller isconnected to the process, ensure that the process is notaffected if fast run is selected.
The default value, No, means that the program will run atthe set rate
Shows the current statusof the programThe choices are:-Run see 6.2.1Hold see 6.2.2Reset see 6.2.3
5. Press to select thelist of parameters forrunning the program.
6. If the Program Number iscorrect and Fast Run is
not required, press toscroll to ‘ProgramStatus’
7. Press or toselect R n
2704 Controller Programmer Operation
Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 6-15
6.6.5. Run Parameter Tables
Table Number:
6.6.5a
These parameters are displayed for arunning program
PROGRAM RUN(General Page)
ParameterName
Parameter Description Value Default AccessLevel
Prog DOs Digital outputs summary
(Up to 16)
æ
= Offæ = On
L1
Time Remaining Time remaining to end ofprogram
NotRunning toh:mm:ss
L3
Days Remaining Number of days left for theprogrammer to run
0 to 255 L3
Fast Run Allows the program to fast run No
Yes
No L3.Alterable inreset orcomplete
Program Status Displays the status of theprogram
ResetRunHoldComplete
L1.
Prog Time Elap Program time elapsed h: mm: ss R/O
Prog Cycle Rem Remaining number of cycles 1 to 999 L1 R/O
(only shownif ‘ProgCycles’ > 1)
Total Segments Number of segments in therunning program
0 to 100 R/O
SegmentNumber
The currently running segmentnumber
1 to 100 L1 R/O
Segment Type Running program segmenttypeProfile = normal segmentEnd Segment = End of progGo Back =repeat part of prog
Profile
EndSegment
Go Back
Profile L1 R/O
Alterable inHold
Segment Name A user defined name for thesegment
DefaultText
L1 R/O
Seg Time Rem Time remaining in the currentsegment
d: h: m: s L1. R/O
Alterable ifTime ToTarget progand in Hold
Programmer Operation 2704 Controller
6-16 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00
Wait Status Wait Status No WaitEvent AEvent BEvent C
No Wait R/O
Wait Condition Wait condition for the runningsegment
No WaitEvent AEvent BEvent C
No Wait L1.Alterable inHold
Prog User Val 1 Active Programmer User Val 1 L1
Prog User Val 2 Active Programmer User Val 2 L1
Goback Rem Number of repeat cyclesremaining
1 to 999 R/O
End Action The state required in the endsegment
DwellReset
R/O
Prog Reset DO These are the digital events inReset
R/OOnly ifconfigured.
Reset UsrVal1 Reset prog user 1 values L3
Reset UsrVal1 Reset prog user 1 values L3
Table Number:
6.6.5b
These parameters are associated withProfiled Setpoint number 1
PROGRAM RUN
(PSP1 Page)
Parameter Name Parameter Description Value Default AccessLevel
Seg Time Rem Segment time remaining h: m: s
PSP1 Type Running segment type forprofiled setpoint 1
StepDwellRamp
R/O - shownin RampRate prog.
PSP1 WSP Working setpoint for profiledsetpoint 1
Displayrange 1
L1. Alterablein Hold
PSP1 Target Running segment target forprofiled setpoint 1
Displayrange 1
L1. Alterablein Hold
PSP1 Dwell Tm Time remaining in runningsegment for profiled SP 1
Displayrange
L1. Alterablein Hold
PSP1 Rate Running segment rate forprofiled setpoint 1
Displayrange 1
L1. Not inTime ToTarget prog
PSP1 HBk Appl Holdback applied for profiledsetpoint 1
No
Yes
R/O - shownif configured
1. Range limited by user defined upper and lower limits
Table 6.6.5b is repeated for PSP2 parameters and PSP3 parameters
ææææ
2704 Controller Programmer Operation
Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 6-17
6.7. TO CREATE OR EDIT A PROGRAM
To create or edit a program it is first necessary to define the parameters associated with theoverall program. These parameters will be found under the page header ‘PROGRAM EDIT(Program)’, see section 6.7.1. and 6.7.2.
Then set up the parameters which define each individual segment. These parameters will befound in the page ‘PROGRAM EDIT (Segments)’, see section 6.7.3. and 6.7.4.
Notes:-1. A running program cannot be edited, it must be put into Reset or Hold mode.
2. Changes can be made to any segment of a currently running program as follows:-
• To the currently running segment - use the PROGRAM RUN page. These changes arealways temporary and apply to the current run only
• To segments subsequent to the current segment - use the PROGRAM EDIT page. Thesechanges are always permanent and will apply to subsequent runs Changes can be made tothe current segment in the PROGRAM EDIT page but do not take effect in the currentlyrunning program.
3. Other programs can be created or edited when another program is running.
6.7.1. To Access the Program Edit pages
Do This This Is The Display YouShould See
Additional Notes
This page allows theoverall programmerparameters to be defined
The value of a parameterprefixed by ! can be
changed using or
The full list of parameters isshown in the following table
1. From any display press to access the page headermenu.
2. Press or to select‘PROGRAM EDIT’
3. Press to show sub-headers
4. Press or (ifnecessary) to select‘Program’
5. Press to showparameters
6. Press again to selectthe highlighted parameter
Programmer Operation 2704 Controller
6-18 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00
6.7.2. PROGRAM EDIT (Program Page) ParametersTable Number:
6.7.2
These parameters affect the overallprogram. Only shown at Level 3.
PROGRAM EDIT
(Program Page)
ParameterName
Parameter Description Value Default Access Level
ProgramNumber
Selects the programnumber to be edited
1 to 20 or
1 to 50
1 L1
Hbk Mode Holdback mode
None = no holdbackapplied
Per prog = common toprog
Per seg = active in everysegment
None
Per Program
PerSegment
None L1
PSP1 HBkType
Holdback type for PSP1(per program)
These are deviationvalues between setpointand process value
Fine and course holdbackallows two levels ofholdback to be applied todifferent segments.
Off
Fine Lo
Fine Hi
Fine Band
Course Lo
Course Hi
CourseBand
Off L1
Only displayedif Per Programconfigured
PSP1FineHbk
Fine holdback value forPSP1
DisplayRange
0 L3. Onlydisplayed if HBkType _ Off
PSP1CourseHbk
Course holdback value forPSP1
DisplayRange
0 L3. Onlydisplayed if HBkType _ Off
The next six parameters are only displayed if PSP2 and PSP3 are configured
PSP2 HbkType
Holdback type for PSP2
These are deviationvalues between setpointand process value
Fine and course holdbackallows two levels ofholdback to be applied todifferent segments.
Off
Fine Lo
Fine Hi
Fine Band
Course Lo
Course Hi
Course Bnd
Off L1
PSP2FineHbk
Fine holdback value forPSP2
DisplayRange
0 L3. Onlydisplayed if HBkType _ Off
PSP2 Course holdback value for Display 0 L3. Only
2704 Controller Programmer Operation
Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 6-19
CourseHbk PSP2 Range displayed if HBkType _ Off
PSP3 HbkType
Holdback type for PSP3
These are deviationvalues between setpointand process value.
Fine and course holdbackallows two levels ofholdback to be applied todifferent segments.
Off
Fine Lo
Fine Hi
Fine Band
Course Lo
Course Hi
Course Bnd
Off L1
PSP3FineHbk
Fine holdback value forPSP3
DisplayRange
0 L3. Onlydisplayed if HBkType _ Off
PSP3CourseHbk
Course holdback value forPSP3
DisplayRange
0 L3. Onlydisplayed if HBkType _ Off
PSP3 HbkValue
Holdback value for PSP3 SP1 hi limitto
SP1 lo limit
0 L3
Hot StartPSP
Allows hot start to beapplied to each PSP.
See also 6.3.5.
None
PSP1
PSP2
PSP3
None L3. Onlyappears if HotStart option hasbeen enabled inconfig level.
Rate Units Rate units for a RampRate Programmer
Per Second
Per Minute
Per Hour
L3. Onlydisplayed if theprogrammer isRamp Rate
Prog Cycles Sets the number of timesthe complete program isexecuted.
Continuousto 999
Continuous L1
End Action Defines the action in theend segment.
Dwell - the program willdwell indefinitely at theconditions set in the endsegment.
Reset - the program willreset to the startconditions.
Dwell
Reset
L1
ProgramName
Allows a user definedname to be given to theprogram number
User string L1
Programmer Operation 2704 Controller
6-20 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00
6.7.3. To Set Up Each Segment of a Program
Do This This Is The Display YouShould See
Additional Notes
.
If the program exists, thesegment details are displayed
If the program is new,confirm as instructed onthe display
Create Prg: 2?
ªTCancel °TOK
Further parameters may be accessed and adjusted in the same way. These are listed togetherwith an explanation of their function in the following table
After a few seconds orwhen ª is pressed thedisplay goes to thesegment parameters .
Up to 100 segments areavailable per program
4. Press to select thesegment parameters
5. Press or toscroll up or down the listof parameters.
6. Press again tochoose parameter.
The value or state of aparameter prefixed by ! can
be changed using or
Tip -- A back and forward scroll is available by holding down and pressing
or respectively
1. From any display press
to access the pageheader menu.
2. Press or toselect ‘PROGRAM EDIT’
3. Press to show sub-headers
4. Press or (ifnecessary) to select‘Segment’
2704 Controller Programmer Operation
Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 6-21
6.7.4. PROGRAM EDIT (Segment) Parameters
Table Number:
6.6.4.
These parameters allow you to set upeach segment in the program
PROGRAM EDIT
(Segment)
ParameterName
Parameter Description Value Default AccessLevel
ProgramNumber
Selects the program numberto be edited
1 to 20
(or 50)
L1
SegmentNumber
Selects the segment numberto be edited
1 to 100 L1
Segment Type Segment type Profile
EndSegment
Go Back
Profile L1
Profile = a normal segment
End Segment = the last segment in the program (press ° to confirm)
Go Back = repeat part of program. Not shown for segment 1.
PSP1 Type Profile setpoint 1 type Step
Dwell
Ramp
L1.
Only shown if Program Type = Ramp Rate and program not in End
PSP1 Target Profile setpoint 1 target value SP1 lo limittoSP1 hi limit
0 L2
PSP1 Dwell Tm Profile setpoint 1 dwell time d : h : m : s L1.
Only shown if Program Type =Ramp Rate; Segment Type = Dwell and program not in End
PSP1 Rate Profile setpoint 1 rate L2.
Only shown if Program Type =Ramp Rate; Segment Type = Dwell and program not in End
PSP1 Hbk Type Profile setpoint 1 holdbacktype
Off
Fine Lo
Fine Hi
Fine Band
Course Lo
Course Hi
CourseBand
Off L2.
Only shown if holdback is configured per segment
Programmer Operation 2704 Controller
6-22 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00
The next ten parameters are only displayed if PSP2 and PSP3 are configured
PSP2 Type Profile setpoint 2 type StepDwellRamp
L2.
Only shown if Program Type = Ramp Rate and program not in End
PSP2 Target Profile setpoint 2 target value SP2 lo limittoSP2 hi limit
0 L2
PSP2 Dwell Tm Profile setpoint 2 dwell time d : h : m : s L2.
Only shown if Program Type =Ramp Rate; Segment Type = Dwell and program not in End
PSP2 Rate Profile setpoint 2 rate L2.
Only shown if Program Type =Ramp Rate; Segment Type = Dwell and program not in End
PSP2 Hbk Type Profile setpoint 2 holdbacktype
Off
Fine Lo
Fine Hi
Fine Band
Course Lo
Course Hi
CourseBand
Off L2.
Only shown if holdback is configured per segment
PSP3 Type Profile setpoint 3 type StepDwellRamp
L2.
Only shown if Program Type = Ramp Rate and program not in End
PSP3 Target Profile setpoint 3 target value SP3 lo limittoSP3 hi limit
0 L2
PSP3 Dwell Tm Profile setpoint 3 dwell time d : h : m : s L2.
Only shown if Program Type =Ramp Rate; Segment Type = Dwell and program not in End
PSP3 Rate Profile setpoint 3 rate L2.
Only shown if Program Type =Ramp Rate; Segment Type = Dwell and program not in End
PSP3 Hbk Type Profile setpoint 3 holdbacktype
Off
Fine Lo
Fine Hi
Fine Band
Course Lo
Course Hi
CourseBand
Off L2.
Only shown if holdback is configured per segment
2704 Controller Programmer Operation
Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 6-23
Seg Duration Duration for Time to Targetprogrammer only
d : h : m : s L2.
Wait Event Wait if selected event is true No waitEvent AEvent BEvent C
No Wait L2.
Only shown if wait events configured
Prog User Val 1 Allows a Programmer UserVal to be chosen. See alsosection 6.3.10.
0 to 100 0 L1
Only shown if Prog User Val 1 is configured
Prog User Val 2 Allows a Programmer UserVal to be chosen. See alsosection 6.3.10.
0 to 100 0 L1
Only shown if Prog User Val 2 is configured
Prog DO Values Sets programmer eventoutputs on or off
L2.
Only shown if Dout configured
GoBack to Seg Allows repeat segments to beset up within a profile. Goback defines the point in theprogram where the repeatsegments are entered.
1 to no. ofsegments
L2.
Only shown if segment. type is Go Back
Go Back Cycles Sets up the number of timesthe segments are repeated
1 to 999 1 L2.
Only shown if segment. type is Go Back
Segment Name Allows a user defined nameto be chosen
DefaultText to Usr50
DefaultText
L1
Programmer Operation 2704 Controller
6-24 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00
6.8. EXAMPLES
6.8.1. To Enter a Program in a Ramp Rate ProgrammerDo This This Is The Display You
Should SeeAdditional Notes
1. From any display press
to access the pageheader menu.
2. Press or toselect ‘PROGRAM EDIT’
3. Press to show sub-headers
4. Press or (ifnecessary) to select‘Segment’
To select a new ProgramNumber.
Press again
Press or tochange the ProgramNumber.
If this is a new program,the message‘Create Prog x?’ will bedisplayed.
Press to confirm
5. Press to show the listof parameters
6. Press or toscroll to the nextparameter in the list(Segment Number)
To select a new SegmentNumber.
Repeat the above
2704 Controller Programmer Operation
Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 6-25
7. Press to select‘Segment Type’
The setpoint will ramp to600 units
When a parameter value isselected to be altered it isunderlined with a flashingcursor.
Select:-Ramp to ramp the setpointup or downDwell to dwellStep to jump from thecurrent setpoint to a newtarget
To select a differentSegment Type:.
Press again
Press or to changethe Segment TypeThe choices are:.
Profile - for Ramp/Dwell/StepEnd SegmentGo Back - to repeatsegments of a program (notsegment 1)
8. Press to select‘PSP1 Type’
To set PSP1 Type to Ramp:
9. Press to select‘PSP1 Type’
10. Press or toselect ‘Ramp’
11. Press to select‘PSP1 Target’
12. Press or toadjust the value
When a parameter value ishighlighted with a
continuous bar use or
to scroll the previousor next parameter.When it is underlined with
a flashing cursor, use to scroll to the nextparameter
Programmer Operation 2704 Controller
6-26 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00
The setpoint will ramp to600 at the rate of 25 unitsper sec, min or hour, as setin PROGRAM EDIT(Program Page).
If PSP1 Type = DwellThis parameter is Dwell Tm
If PSP1 Type = StepThis parameter is omitted
15. Continue to press to select further parameters for Segment 1, and to change their
values using or .
16. Now set up Segment 2 by repeating the above steps.
Tip -- A back and forward scroll is available by holding down and pressing or
respectively
17. Repeat the procedure until all segments have been set up. The last segment should bedefined as ‘Segment Type = End Segment’ .
13. Press to select‘PSP1 Rate’
14. Press or toadjust the value
2704 Controller Programmer Operation
Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 6-27
If Wait Events have been configured:-
If Digital Event Outputs have been Configured:-
If Programmer User Values have been configured
The first digital output willalternate between and _indicating that it can bechanged.
= Offæ = On
1. Press to select‘Prog DO Val’
2. Press or to turna digital output On or Off.
3. Press to scrollthrough each event outputin turn
1. Press to select‘Prog Usr Val 1 (or 2)’
2. Press or toselect the value to use.
1. Press to select ‘WaitEvent’
2. Press or to selectthe ‘wait event’
The choice are:-No WaitEvent AEvent BEventC
See also 6.7.4
Programmer Operation 2704 Controller
6-28 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00
6.8.2. To Enter a Program in a Time to Target Programmer
This is the same as the previous procedure except that there are no Dwell, Rate or Step PSPs.They are all TimePSPs.Steps 1 to 10 shown in the Ramp Rate example are the same for the Time to Targetprogrammer. From the PROGRAM EDIT (Segment Page) parameters:-
Do This This Is The Display YouShould See
Additional Notes
For any segment _ 1, thisvalue will normally beinherited from the Targetlevel of the previoussegment.
11. Press to select ‘PSP1Target’
12. Press or to set thetarget level of the segmenteg 100
The setpoint will ramp to100 at the rate of 1 unitper sec, min or hour
As in the previousexample, if PSP2, PSP3,Wait Events and EventOutputs have beenconfigured they willappear here.
For a ramp set PSP-Target to a new value
For a dwell set PSP- tothe previous value.
13. Press to scroll to ‘SegDuration’
14. Press or to set thetarget level of the segmenteg 0:01:00
Repeat the procedure until all segments have been set up. The last segment should bedefined as ‘Segment Type = End Segment’ .
Tip -- There are two ways to return to a previous parameter in a list.
1. A back and forward scroll is available by holding down and pressing or respectively
2. Press once and use the or button
2704 Controller Programmer Operation
Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 6-29
6.8.3. To Apply HoldbackTo apply holdback (see also 6.3.8) to each segment of the program or to the overall program,follow this procedure:-
Do This This Is The Display YouShould See
Additional Notes
This is fully described in6.7.1.
1. Select PROGRAM EDIT(Program Page)
This parameter onlyappears if Holdback hasbeen configured.
If per program is chosenthe next parameter is‘HBk Type’.
If per segment is chosenthe parameter ‘HBk Type’does not appear.
3. Press to choose‘HBk Mode’
4. Press to select ‘HBkMode’
5. Press or tochoose Per Program (orPer Segment)
For HBk Mode = per program.
6. Press to select PSP1HBk Type
7. Press or tochoose the type eg FineLo
The choices are:-Off; Fine Lo; Fine Hi; FineBand; Coarse Lo: CoarseHi; Coarse Band.
If HBk Type ≠ Off, thenext parameter allows theholdback value to be setup.
2. Press to show the listof parameters
Programmer Operation 2704 Controller
6-30 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00
10. Repeat the above steps forPSP2 and PSP3 if thesehave been configured.
Note:If holdback per segment is chosen the holdback type can be set up in each segment. Theholdback value, however, is the same for each segment.
In this example holdbackwill occur in any segmentof the program if the PVfalls by more than 5 unitsbelow the SP.
8. Press to select PSP1Fine HBk
9. Press or to set thevalue of the Fine Holdback
2704 Controller Programmer Operation
Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 6-31
6.8.4. To Apply WaitThe wait feature prevents the programmer from proceeding to the next segment if an event istrue (see also section 6.3.7.). It only applies to controllers which have been ‘wired’ for waitevents in configuration level. If the controller has been configured for ‘Wait’, the operatorcan set up the conditions as follows:-
Do This This Is The Display YouShould See
Additional Notes
1. Select the PROGRAM EDIT(Segment Page)
This selects the WaitEvent which will preventthe program fromproceeding to the nextsegment.
The choices are:-
NoWait
The waitconditiondoes notapply to theselectedsegment
EventA (Bor C)
The selectedsegment willwait for eventA (B or C) tobecome falsebefore theprogramcontinues
2. Press to show the listof parameters
3. Press or toscroll to ‘Wait Event’
4. Press to select ‘WaitEvent’
5. Press or tochoose the event onwhich the programmershould wait eg ‘Event A’
Programmer Operation 2704 Controller
6-32 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00
6.8.5. To Display Wait Status in Run ModeThe status of ’Wait’ is displayed in the ‘PROGRAM RUN’ page as follows:-
Do This This Is The Display YouShould See
Additional Notes
1. Select ‘PROGRAM RUN(General Page)
The status is off if notwaiting and true if waiting.The choices are:-
NoWait
The programis not waiting
EventA (Bor C)
The programis waiting onevent A (B orC)
4. Press to scroll to‘Wait Condition’
Wait condition is the WaitEvent set up in eachsegment, e.g. WaitAmeans - ‘the eventcausing a wait in thissegment’.
In ‘Hold’ this parametercan be changed to ‘NoWait’ to override a waitcondition.
The choices are:-No WaitEvent A (B or C)
The condition can bechanged if the program isin Hold
2. Press to show theparameter list
3. Press or toscroll to ‘Wait Status’
5. Press to select the‘Wait Condition’
6. Press or tooverride the condition (NoWait), or to select adifferent event (Event A, Bor C)
2704 Controller Programmer Operation
Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 6-33
6.8.6. To Set Up Program NamesTo produce a user defined program name:-
Do This This Is The Display YouShould See
Additional Notes
1. Select the PROGRAM EDIT(Program) page header
2. Press to showparameters
3. Press again to select‘Program Number’
4. Press or toselect the programnumber
Program 1 is the defaultname of the program.
A full range of charactersis available includingcapitals, numbers andcommon symbols
5. Press to scroll to‘Program Name’
6. Press or tochange the highlightedcharacter to one of yourchoice
7. Press to select the next character which you wish to change
8. Then Press or to change the character
9. Continue until the program name of your choice is displayed. A name of up to 16characters can be entered.
This name will be displayed on every view which contains Program Name.
Programmer Operation 2704 Controller
6-34 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00
6.8.7. To Set Up Segment NamesEvery segment can be given a name. The name is called up from ‘User Text’ and isdisplayed on the programmer mimic diagram. User Text is set up in configuration level asexplained in 2700 Engineering Manual Part No. HA026502.To select segment names:-
Do This This Is The Display YouShould See
Additional Notes
1. Select the PROGRAM EDIT(Segment) page header
2. Press to showparameters
3. Press again to select‘Program Number’
4. Press or to selectthe number of the program
Default Text will displaythe segment number onlyon the programmermimic.
Other choices are:-01:Usr 1 to 50:Usr 50.This gives up to 50 userdefined names.
7. Press to scroll to‘Segment Name’
8. Press or toselect the required textfrom the User Text list
5. Press to scroll to‘Segment Number’
6. Press or toselect the segment to benamed
2704 Controller Digital Programmer
Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 6A-1
6A. CHAPTER 6A DIGITAL PROGRAMMER ........................ 26A.1. WHAT IS THE DIGITAL PROGRAMMER?.......................................26A.1.1. To Edit The Digital Programmer..............................................................36A.1.2. Digital Program Edit Page........................................................................46A.1.3. To Run The Digital Programmer From The Run List ..............................56A.1.4. Digital Program 1 to 4 Page .....................................................................66A.2. POWER FAIL RECOVERY ...................................................................6
Digital Programmer 2704 Controller
6A-2 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00
6A. Chapter 6A DIGITAL PROGRAMMER
6A.1. WHAT IS THE DIGITAL PROGRAMMER?
The digital programmer provides a timed control of a single digital output. It may be usedduring any segment of a Setpoint Programmer or it may be used independently of theSetpoint Programmer.
A sequence of eight Off and On times may be set for the output and up to four DigitalPrograms can be set. Figure 6-4 shows an example of a timed digital output program.
Figure 6A-1: An Example of a Programmed Digital Output
Step Time DescriptionOn 1 1:00:00.0 On starting the sequence the output will be ON for 1 hourOff 1 0:30:00.0 The output switches OFF for 30 minutesOn 2 0:05:00.0 The output switches ON for 5 minutesOff 2 0:30:00.0 The output switches OFF for 30 minutesOn 3 1:00:00.0 The output switches ON for 1 hourOff 3 0:25:00.0 The output switches OFF for 25 minutesOn 4 0:10:00.0 The output switches ON for 10 minutesOff 4 0:00:00.0On 5 0:00:00.0Off 5 0:00:00.0 The step is omitted for any time set to zeroOn 6 0:00:00.0Off 7 0:00:00.0On 8 1:10:00.0 The output switches ON for 1 hour 10 minutesOff 8 0:40:00.0 The output switches OFF for 40 minutes and is then reset to the start
of the sequence
The sequence may be run by:
1. Setting the ‘Run/Hold’ parameter to On
2. From an external source such as a push-button switch wired to a digital input
3. In any segment of a setpoint program if it has been wired, for example, to a ProgrammerUser Value.
Time
On
Off
On 1 On 2 On 3 On 4 On 8
Off 1 Off 2 Off 3 Off 8
2704 Controller Digital Programmer
Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 6A-3
6A.1.1. To Edit The Digital Programmer
Do This This Is The Display YouShould See
Additional Notes
1. From any display press
to access the pageheader menu.
2. Press or toselect ‘DIGITAL PROG’
3. Press to show sub-headers
4. Press or toselect ‘Edit Program’
5. Press to show the listof parameters
6. Press again to select‘Prog Select’
7. Press or tochange the programnumber if required
Up to four programs canbe chosen
8. Press to select ‘On1’
9. Press or toincrease or decrease theon time for the first outputin the sequence
10. Repeat for the eight Onand Off periods whichmake up the sequence
Tip --To enter a large time
period press and together. This willunderline the mins andhours sectionsindependently each time
the button is pressed.
The hours/mins can thenbe raised or lowered using
or
The full list of parametersis shown in the followingtable
Digital Programmer 2704 Controller
6A-4 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00
6A.1.2. Digital Program Edit Page
Table Number:
6A.1.2.
These parameters edit the digitalprogrammer
DIGITAL PROG
(Edit Program Page)
Parameter Name Parameter Description Value Default AccessLevel
Prog Select Program select Prog 1 toProg 4
Prog 1 L3
On 1 On period 1 0:00:00.0 L3
Off 1 On period 1 0:00:00.0 0:00:00.0 L3
On 2 On period 2 to 0:00:00.0 L3
Off 2 On period 2 99:59:59.9 0:00:00.0 L3
On 3 On period 3 0:00:00.0 L3
Off 3 On period 3 If this 0:00:00.0 L3
On 4 On period 4 setting is 0:00:00.0 L3
Off 4 On period 4 exceeded 0:00:00.0 L3
On 5 On period 5 HHHH is 0:00:00.0 L3
Off 5 On period 5 displayed. 0:00:00.0 L3
On 6 On period 6 To reduce 0:00:00.0 L3
Off 6 On period 6 the value 0:00:00.0 L3
On 7 On period 7 Press and 0:00:00.0 L3
Off 7 On period 7 hold 0:00:00.0 L3
On 8 On period 8 button 0:00:00.0 L3
Off 8 On period 8 0:00:00.0 L3
2704 Controller Digital Programmer
Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 6A-5
6A.1.3. To Run The Digital Programmer From The Run List
Do This This Is The Display YouShould See
Additional Notes
1. From any display press
to access the pageheader menu.
2. Press or toselect ‘DIGITAL PROG’
3. Press to show sub-headers
4. Press or toselect ‘Dig Prog 1’
5. Press to show the listof parameters
6. Press again to select‘Reset Disable
7. Press or to ‘On’
When a digital program iscomplete, this parameter isreset to Off
8. Press to select‘Run/Hold’
9. Press or to ‘On’
When a digital program iscomplete, this parameter isreset to Off
The full list of parametersis shown in the followingtable
Digital Programmer 2704 Controller
6A-6 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00
6A.1.4. Digital Program 1 to 4 Page
Table Number:
6A.1.4.
These parameters are associated withDigital Programs 1 to 4
DIGITAL PROG
(Dig Prog x Page)
Parameter Name Parameter Description Value Default AccessLevel
Reset Disable Reset Off
On
Off L1
Run/Hold Run or hold Off
On
Off L1
OP Enable Enables the output Off
On
Off L1
Reset on PFail Power fail response Off
On
Off L3
Program Cycle Number of cycles for thesequence
Continuousto 999
Continuous L1
Seg Time Rem Segment time remaining 0:00:00.0to99:59:59.9
L1
Output Shows the current state ofthe output
Off
On
L1
Output (Inv) Shows the current invertedstate of the output
Off
On
L1
Prg End Program complete
Off = prog running`
On = prog complete
Off
On
L1 R/O
6A.2. POWER FAIL RECOVERY
In the event of a power fail to the controller, a parameter, ‘Reset on Pfail’, may be set inconfiguration level which defines how the controller behaves on restoration of the power.If this parameter = ‘On’ then ‘Run/Hold’ =’Off’ and ‘Reset Disable’ = ‘Off’ at power up.
If Run/Hold and Reset Disable have been soft wired in configuration level they override thisstate.
2704 Controller Alarm Operation
Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 7-1
7. CHAPTER 7 ALARM OPERATION .................................... 27.1. DEFINITION OF ALARMS AND EVENTS ............................................27.1.1. Customisable Parameter Names..................................................................27.2. TYPES OF ALARM USED IN 2704 CONTROLLER .............................37.2.1. Full Scale High............................................................................................37.2.2. Full Scale Low ............................................................................................37.2.3. Deviation High Alarm.................................................................................47.2.4. Deviation Low Alarm..................................................................................47.2.5. Deviation Band ...........................................................................................57.2.6. Rate Of Change Alarm (Negative Direction) ..............................................67.2.7. Rate Of Change Alarm (Positive Direction)................................................67.3. BLOCKING ALARMS ...............................................................................77.3.1. Full Scale Low With Blocking....................................................................77.3.2. Full Scale High Alarm With Blocking ........................................................77.3.3. Deviation Band With Blocking ...................................................................87.4. LATCHING ALARMS................................................................................97.4.1. Latched Alarm (Full Scale High) With Automatic Reset ............................97.4.2. Latched Alarm (Full Scale High) With Manual Reset ..............................107.4.3. Grouped Alarms........................................................................................107.5. HOW ALARMS ARE INDICATED ........................................................117.5.1. Alarm Delay Time.....................................................................................117.6. THE ALARM SUMMARY PAGE...........................................................127.6.1. Alarms (Summary) Parameters .................................................................137.7. ALARM ACKNOWLEDGEMENT.........................................................157.7.1. To Acknowledge a Latched Alarm............................................................167.8. TO SET ALARM TRIP LEVELS AND HYSTERESIS.........................177.9. ALARM PARAMETERS..........................................................................187.9.1. ALARMS (LP1 Page) Parameters ............................................................187.9.2. ALARMS (PV Input Page) Parameters.....................................................197.9.3. ALARMS (An Input Page) Parameters.....................................................207.9.4. ALARMS (Module 1 Page) Parameters....................................................217.9.5. ALARMS (User 1 Page) Parameters.........................................................22
Alarm Operation 2704 Controller
7-2 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00
7. Chapter 7 ALARM OPERATION
7.1. DEFINITION OF ALARMS AND EVENTS
Alarms are used to alert an operator when a pre-set level or condition has been exceeded.They are normally used to switch an output - usually a relay - to provide interlocking of themachine or plant or external audio or visual indication of the condition.
Soft Alarms are indication only within the controller and are not attached to an output(relay).
Events - can also be alarms - but are generally defined as conditions which occur as part ofthe normal operation of the plant. They do not generally require operator intervention. Anexample might be to open/close a vent during a programmer cycle.The controller does not display the alarm status on the front panel.
For the purposes of the operation of this controller, alarms and events can be considered thesame.
7.1.1. Customisable Parameter Names
Throughout this chapter parameter names shown in italics are customisable by the userwhen in configuration access level. The name of the parameter may vary, therefore,from instrument to instrument.Typical customisable parameter names are:Alarm namesLoop namesModule and input namesCustom unitsPromoted parameters
2704 Controller Alarm Operation
Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 7-3
Hysteresis is thedifference betweenthe alarm ON valueand the alarm OFFvalue. It is used toprevent relay chatter.
Alarm ON
Alarm OFF
Time →
↑MV
↓Hysteresis
↑
Alarmsetpoint
7.2. TYPES OF ALARM USED IN 2704 CONTROLLER
This section describes graphically the operation of different types of alarm used in the 2704controller. The graphs show measured value plotted against time. The measured value maybe any analogue value available in the controller.
7.2.1. Full Scale High
The Process Variable (PV) exceeds a set high level
7.2.2. Full Scale Low
The Process Variable (PV) exceeds a set low level
Time →
↑MV
↓Hysteresis
↑Alarmsetpoint
Alarm ON
Alarm OFF
Alarm Operation 2704 Controller
7-4 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00
7.2.3. Deviation High AlarmThe alarm occurs when the difference between the process variable and the setpoint ispositive by greater than the alarm setpoint.
Note: For User Analogue Value the deviation is the difference between the two user wiredanalogue inputs.
7.2.4. Deviation Low AlarmThe alarm occurs when the difference between the process variable and the setpoint isnegative by greater than the alarm setpoint.
Note: For User Analogue Value the deviation is the difference between the two user wiredanalogue inputs.
ProcessVariable
AlarmSetpoint
WorkingSetpoint
U
HysteresisS
TimeT
S
PV Alarm ON
Alarm OFF
U
S
ProcessVariable
AlarmSetpoint
WorkingSetpoint
TimeT
S
PV
Alarm ON
Alarm OFF
U
Hysteresis
S
U
S
2704 Controller Alarm Operation
Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 7-5
7.2.5. Deviation BandA deviation band alarm monitors the process variable and the working setpoint andcontinuously compares the difference against the alarm setpoint. If the difference is eithernegative by less than, or positive by greater than the alarm setpoint, the alarm state will beactive.
ProcessVariable
Alarm Setpoint
WorkingSetpoint
TimeT
S
PV
Alarm Setpoint
Alarm ON
Alarm OFFU
Hysteresis
S
U
SU
Hysteresis
S
U
S
Alarm Operation 2704 Controller
7-6 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00
7.2.6. Rate Of Change Alarm (Negative Direction)The Process Value falls faster than the alarm setting.
7.2.7. Rate Of Change Alarm (Positive Direction)The Process Value rises faster than the alarm setting.
Notes:1. Separate alarms are required for positive and negative rates of change2. An alarm is indicated during the period that the actual rate of change is greater than the
set rate of change.3. There may be a small delay before the instrument displays an alarm condition since the
instrument requires several samples. This delay increases if the set value and actual valueare close together
4. A hysteresis value of, say, 1 unit per second will prevent the alarm from ‘chattering’ ifthe rate of change varies by this amount
Time→
↑PV
↓
↑Hysteresis
NegativeRate of
Change setto x units per
Actual rate ofchange > x
units per min
Alarm On
Alarm Off
Time →
↑PV
↓
↑Hysteresis
Positive Rateof Change
set to x unitsper min
Actual rate ofchange > x
units per min
Alarm On
Alarm Off
2704 Controller Alarm Operation
Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 7-7
7.3. BLOCKING ALARMS
A Blocking Alarm only occurs after it has been through a start up phase. It is typically usedto prevent alarms from being indicated until the process has settled to its normal workingconditions.
7.3.1. Full Scale Low With BlockingThe alarm only occurs after the start up phase when low alarm has first entered a safe state.The next time a low alarm occurs will cause the alarm to become active.
7.3.2. Full Scale High Alarm With BlockingThe alarm only occurs after the start up phase when high alarm has first entered a safe state.The next time a high alarm occurs will cause the alarm to become active.
i.e. If the controller ispowered up with PV >’Hi Alarm SP’ no alarmis indicated. The PVmust reduce below the‘High Alarm SP’ andincrease again to > ‘HiAlarm SP’. The alarmcondition will then beindicated.If the controller ispowered up with PV <‘Hi Alarm SP’ an alarmis indicated as soon asPV > ‘Hi Alarm SP’
Time →
↑MV
↓Hysteresis
↑Alarmsetpoint
Alarm ON
Alarm OFF
ProcessVariable
Alarm ON
Alarm OFF
Time →
↑MV
↓Hysteresis
↑
Alarmsetpoint
ProcessVariable
Alarm Operation 2704 Controller
7-8 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00
7.3.3. Deviation Band With BlockingThe alarm only occurs after the start up phase when low deviation alarm has first entered asafe state. The next time an alarm occurs, whether high band or low band will cause thealarm to become active.
AlarmOn
Process Variable
AlarmOff
Alarm Setpoint
WorkingSetpoint
AlarmOff
TimeT
S
PVAlarm
OnAlarm
OffAlarm
OnAlarm
Off
Alarm Setpoint
U
SU
Hysteresis
S
U
Hysteresis
S
U
S
2704 Controller Alarm Operation
Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 7-9
7.4. LATCHING ALARMS
The alarm is indicated until it is acknowledged by the user. Acknowledgement of an alarmcan be through the controller front buttons, from an external source using a digital input tothe controller or through digital communications.
There are two ways that the alarm can be acknowledged:
1. Automatic Reset. The alarm continues to be active until both the alarm condition isremoved AND the alarm is acknowledged. The acknowledgement can occur BEFOREthe alarm condition is removed.
2. Manual Reset. The alarm continues to be active until both the alarm condition is
removed AND the alarm is acknowledged. The acknowledgement can only occurAFTER the alarm condition is removed.
These are shown below for a Full Scale High Alarm
7.4.1. Latched Alarm (Full Scale High) With Automatic ResetThe alarm is displayed until it is acknowledged
Alarm ON
Alarm OFF
Time →
↑MV
↓Hysteresis
↑
Alarmsetpoint
Automatic Reset
Once the alarm has been acknowledged it willclear when it is no longer true
Alarm Acknowledged
Alarm Operation 2704 Controller
7-10 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00
7.4.2. Latched Alarm (Full Scale High) With Manual Reset
7.4.3. Grouped Alarms
Alarms can be associated with different aspects of the process. They are grouped inaccordance with the functions they perform as follows:
Loop Alarms Alarms associated with each control loop. Examples are: High,Low, Deviation and Rate of Change. Two alarms are available foreach loop. On a new controller these are the only alarms which areconfigured - those listed below must be enabled in configurationlevel, see Engineering Handbook HA026761.
PV Input Alarms Alarms which operate on the PV input. Examples are: High andLow. Two alarms are available with this input.
Analogue InputAlarms
Alarms which operate on the analogue input. Examples are: Highand Low. Two alarms are available with this input.
Module Alarms Alarms which operate on each plug in module. These can be inputor output alarms depending upon the function of the module fitted.These alarms are associated with modules 1, 3, 4, 5, & 6, sincemodule 2 is reserved as a an extra memory module
User Alarms Eight undedicated alarms which can be wired to any variable.
Alarm ON
Alarm OFF
Time →
↑MV
↓Hysteresis
↑
Alarmsetpoint
Manual Reset
Alarm Acknowledged
Acknowledging here will notreset the alarm because it is stillin an alarm condition
The alarm must first clearbefore it can be reset.
2704 Controller Alarm Operation
Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 7-11
7.5. HOW ALARMS ARE INDICATED
When an alarm occurs a message will appear on the display which will indicate the sourceand the type of alarm. The format of this alarm message is:
When the alarm has been acknowledged the message shown in the banner of the pop upwindow above will now be shown in the Loop Display page.The symbol will be shown steady in the top banner of any page if any alarm is still present.
If a relay has been connected to the output of the alarm, it will operate to allow an externalbeacon or audible device to be activated. The relay will be de-activated when the alarm isacknowledged.
7.5.1. Alarm Delay TimeA delay time can be set for each alarm between the occurrence of the alarm and the indicationof the alarm in the controller. This is useful to prevent spurious alarms from being indicatedin some noisy or rapidly changing processes.To set delay time the controller must be placed in Configuration level. This is described inthe 2704 Engineering Handbook Part No HA026933.
If delay time has been configured for the alarm the user may be aware that the occurrence ofan alarm may not necessarily correspond with the display of the alarm
Press ª+° to Ack
:LP1
Full Scale LowAlarm source
Alarm message
Instruction
alternates for an unacknowledgedalarm
Alarm Operation 2704 Controller
7-12 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00
7.6. THE ALARM SUMMARY PAGE
The status of alarms is displayed in the Alarm Summary page. To inspect the status:
Do This This Is The Display YouShould See
Additional Notes
1. From any display press
as many times asnecessary to access thepage header menu
2. Press or toselect ‘ALARMS’
The first sub-header isSummary.
Further sub-headers onlyappear if the alarms havebeen configured.
3. Press to displaysub-headers
4. Press to display asummary of alarmparameters
5. Press or toscroll down the list ofalarm messages.
The full list of parameters is shown in the following table
The alarm message willalternate between thesource of the alarm andthe type of alarm. It canbe acknowledged fromeither view.
For a non-latched alarm,the message willdisappear when the alarmis no longer present.
For a latched alarm, themessage will remain untilthe alarm condition isremoved.See also section 7.7.1.
Parameters shown ! canbe adjusted. Forexample, the alarmacknowledge parameter =‘No’ or ’Yes’
2704 Controller Alarm Operation
Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 7-13
7.6.1. Alarms (Summary) Parameters
Table Number:
7-6-1
These parameters indicate alarm status ALARMS
(Summary Page)
Parameter Name Parameter Description Value Default AccessLevel
New Alarm This is a parameteravailable over digitalcommunications to flag thata new alarm has occurred
NoYes
L1 R/O
LP1 Ack Status and acknowledge thealarms associated with loop1
No
Yes
L1
LP2 Ack Status and acknowledge thealarms associated with loop2
No
Yes
L1
LP3 Ack Status and acknowledge thealarms associated with loop3
No
Yes
L1
PV Input Ack Status and acknowledge thealarms associated with thePV input
No
Yes
L1
An Input Ack Status and acknowledge thealarms associated with theanalogue input
No
Yes
L1
Module 1 Ack Status and acknowledge thealarms associated withmodule 1
No
Yes
L1
Module 3 Ack Status and acknowledge thealarms associated withmodule 3
No
Yes
L1
Module 4 Ack Status and acknowledge thealarms associated withmodule 4
No
Yes
L1
Module 5 Ack Status and acknowledge thealarms associated withmodule 5
No
Yes
L1
Module 6 Ack Status and acknowledge thealarms associated withmodule 6
No
Yes
L1
User 1 Ack Status and acknowledge thealarm associated with User1
No
Yes
L1
User 2 Ack Status and acknowledge thealarm associated with User
No
Yes
L1
Alarm Operation 2704 Controller
7-14 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00
2
User 3 Ack Status and acknowledge thealarm associated with User3
No
Yes
L1
User 4 Ack Status and acknowledge thealarm associated with User4
No
Yes
L1
User 5 Ack Status and acknowledge thealarm associated with User5
No
Yes
L1
User 6 Ack Status and acknowledge thealarm associated with User6
No
Yes
L1
User 7 Ack Status and acknowledge thealarm associated with User7
No
Yes
L1
User 8 Ack Status and acknowledge thealarm associated with User8
No
Yes
L1
Ack All Acknowledges all alarms No
Yes
L3
2704 Controller Alarm Operation
Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 7-15
7.7. ALARM ACKNOWLEDGEMENT
A new alarm can be acknowledged in four ways:
1. By pressing and simultaneously2. From an external source, such as a pushbutton, connected to a suitably configured digital
input3. Through digital communications
The message will remain on the screen and the alarm symbol, , will continue to flash until
the alarm is acknowledged - you are prompted to do this by pressing and simultaneously. The symbol will stop flashing and remain illuminated until all alarmconditions are removed. If a further alarm occurs the symbol will start flashing again and anew alarm message will pop up.
The message displayed indicates the source of the alarm and may be customised to the usersterminology. The source will inherit the name of the channel or the loop or the user alarmname.
The operation of the alarm acknowledgement depends whether the alarm is non-latching orlatching, auto or manual reset. This is shown in the following tables:-
Non Latched Alarms
AlarmCondition
Acknowledge Symbol Message Ext relay(if fitted)
ON No Flashing Alarm message OnOff No Off Former display Off
AlarmCondition
Acknowledge Symbol Alarm message Ext relay(if fitted)
ON No Flashing Alarm message OnOn Yes Steady Former display OffOff Off Former message Off
Latched Alarm - Auto
AlarmCondition
Acknowledge Symbol Message Ext relay(if fitted)
ON No Flashing Alarm message OnOff No Flashing Alarm message OnOff Yes
AlarmCondition
Acknowledge Symbol Message Ext relay(if fitted)
ON No Flashing Alarm message OnON Yes Steady °:Access Level OffOff - Off Normal display Off
Alarm Operation 2704 Controller
7-16 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00
Latched Alarm - Manual
AlarmCondition
Acknowledge Symbol Message Ext relay(if fitted)
ON No Flashing Alarm message OnOff No Flashing Alarm message OnOff Yes Off Access Level Off
AlarmCondition
Acknowledge Symbol Message Ext relay(if fitted)
ON No Flashing Alarm message OnON Yes Steady Former display OffOff - Steady Former display OffOff To acknowledge
see belowOff Former display Off
7.7.1. To Acknowledge a Latched Alarm
Do This This Is The Display YouShould See
Additional Notes
Note:To acknowledge all alarms scroll to Ack All?
and press or to ‘Yes’
1. From the ALARMS(Summary) page press
or to select thealarm to acknowledge
2. Press to select thealarm
3. Press . or toAck:= Yes
4. To confirm the
acknowledge, press as instructed in the popup window.
If the alarm is latched -manual the alarm cannotbe acknowledged until thealarm condition is removed
If it is latched - Automaticyou can acknowledge atany time but the alarmmessage will onlydisappear when the alarmcondition is removed.
See also &.4
2704 Controller Alarm Operation
Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 7-17
7.8. TO SET ALARM TRIP LEVELS AND HYSTERESIS
The alarm trip level (setpoint) is available in access level 1 and is adjusted by accessing thepage header for the chosen alarm. The hysteresis is available in access level 3. Thefollowing example adjusts these parameters for Alarm 1/Loop 1:
Do This This Is The Display YouShould See
Additional Notes
3. Press to display thelist of sub-headers
4. Press or toselect the source of thealarm, in this exampleLP1
6. Press or toscroll to ‘Alm1 setpoint’
7. Press to select theAL1 Setpoint
8. Press or toadjust the value
This example sets thealarm trip level to 178units
The alarm type must havebeen selected in configlevel. Otherwise the alarmparameters will not beavailable
Hysteresis defines thedifference between alarmON and alarm OFF value.
This example sets thealarm hysteresis to 1 unit
1. From any display press
as many times asnecessary to access thepage header menu
2. Press or toselect ‘ALARMS’
5. Press to display thelist of alarm parametersfor LP1
9. Press to select the‘Alm1 Hyst’
10. Press or toadjust the value
Alarm Operation 2704 Controller
7-18 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00
7.9. ALARM PARAMETERS
The parameter tables listed in this section are only displayed if an alarm has been configuredfor the particular loop, input or module.
7.9.1. ALARMS ( LP1 Page) ParametersTable Number:
7.9.1.
These parameters set up the Loop 1 alarms ALARMS
(LP1) Page
Parameter Name Parameter Description Value Default AccessLevel
Alm1 Type Alarm 1 Type OffFull Scale LowFull ScaleHighDeviationBandDeviation HighDeviation LowRate ofChangeIf TrueIf FalseGoes TrueGoes FalseIf Changed
R/O
Alm1 Setpoint Alarm 1 Setpoint Controllerrange
L1
Alm1 Hyst Alarm 1 hysteresis Controllerrange
L3
Alm1 Output Alarm 1 output OffOn
Off R/O
Alm1 Inhibit Alarm 1 inhibit NoYes
No L3
Alm2 Type Alarm 2 Type As Alm1 Type R/O
Alm2 Setpoint Alarm 2 Setpoint Controllerrange
L1
Alm2 Hyst Alarm 2 hysteresis Controllerrange
L3
Alm2 Output Alarm 2 output OffOn
Off R/O
Alm2 Inhibit Alarm 2 inhibit NoYes
No L3
The above table is repeated for LP2 and LP3 if three control loops have been configured.
2704 Controller Alarm Operation
Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 7-19
7.9.2. ALARMS (PV Input Page) Parameters
Table Number:
7.9.2.
These parameters set up the alarmsassociated with the PV input signal.
ALARMS
(PV Input Page)
Parameter Name Parameter Description Value Default AccessLevel
PV Alarm Ack Alarm acknowledge for PVinput
NoYes
No L1
FS Hi Setpoint Full Scale High Alarm (1)Setpoint
Controllerrange
L1
FS Hi Hyst Full Scale High alarm (1)hysteresis
Controllerrange
L3
FS Hi Output Full Scale High alarm (1)output
Off
On
Off R/O
FS Lo Setpoint Full Scale Low Alarm (2)Setpoint
Controllerrange
L1
FS Lo Hyst Full Scale Low alarm (2)hysteresis
Controllerrange
L3
FS Lo Output Full Scale Low alarm (2)output
Off
On
Off R/O
Inhibit Alarm 1 inhibit (one peralarm)
No
Yes
No L3
Alarm Operation 2704 Controller
7-20 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00
7.9.3. ALARMS (An Input Page) Parameters
Table Number:
7.9.3.
These parameters set up the alarms associatedwith the analogue input signal.
ALARMS
(An Input Page)
Parameter Name Parameter Description Value Default AccessLevel
An Alm Ack Group alarm acknowledgefor analogue input
NoYes
No L1
FS Hi Setpoint Full Scale High alarm (1)Setpoint
Controllerrange
L1
FS Hi Hyst Full Scale High alarm (1)hysteresis
Controllerrange
L2
FS Hi Output Full Scale High alarm (1)output
Off
On
Off R/O
FS Lo Setpoint Full Scale Low Alarm (2)Setpoint
Controllerrange
L1
FS Lo Hyst Full Scale Low alarm (2)hysteresis
Controllerrange
L3
FS Lo Output Full Scale Low alarm (2)output
Off
On
Off R/O
Inhibit Alarm 1 inhibit (one peralarm)
No
Yes
No L3
2704 Controller Alarm Operation
Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 7-21
7.9.4. ALARMS (Module 1 Page) Parameters
Table Number:
7.9.4.
These parameters set up the alarmsassociated with module 1.
ALARMS
(Module 1 Page)
Parameter Name Parameter Description Value Default AccessLevel
Module 1 Ack Group alarm acknowledgefor module 1
NoYes
No L1
FS Hi Setpoint Full Scale High alarm (1)Setpoint
Controllerrange
L1
FS Hi Hyst Full Scale High alarm (1)hysteresis
Controllerrange
L2
FS Hi Output Full Scale High alarm (1)output
Off
On
Off R/O
FS Lo Setpoint Full Scale Low Alarm (3)Setpoint
Controllerrange
L1
FS Lo Hyst Full Scale Low alarm (3)hysteresis
Controllerrange
L3
FS Lo Output Full Scale Low alarm (3)output
Off
On
Off R/O
Inhibit Alarm 1 inhibit (one peralarm)
No
Yes
No L3
The above table is repeated for:Module 3Module 4Module 5Module 6
Alarm Operation 2704 Controller
7-22 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00
7.9.5. ALARMS (User 1 Page) Parameters
Table Number:
7.9.5.
These parameters set up user definedalarms.
ALARMS
(User 1 Page)
Parameter Name Parameter Description Value Default AccessLevel
Alm1 Type Alarm 1 Type Same as7.9.1.
R/O
User 1 Ack Group alarm acknowledgefor user alarm 1
NoYes
No L1
Latching Indicates if the alarm hasbeen configured as latching
None
Auto
Manual
Event
R/O atL3
Blocking Indicates if the alarm hasbeen configured as blocking
No
Yes
R/O atL3
Setpoint Alarm 1 Setpoint Controllerrange
L1
Hyst Alarm 1 hysteresis Controllerrange
L3
Output Alarm 1 output Off
On
Off R/O atL1
Val A Input A value. Normallyinternally wired to the PV
Disp min todisp max
R/O atL3 wiredto PVsource if
Val B Input B value. Used if theuser alarm is deviation.Normally internally wired tothe SP
Disp min todisp max
R/O atL3 wiredto PVsource if
Inhibit Alarm inhibit No
Yes
No L3
The above table is repeated for:
User alarm 2 User alarm 5User alarm 3 User alarm 6User alarm 4 User alarm 7
User alarm 8
2704 Controller Tuning
Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 8-1
8. CHAPTER 8 TUNING ......................................................... 28.1. WHAT IS TUNING .....................................................................................28.2. AUTOMATIC TUNING .............................................................................38.2.1. One-shot Tuning..........................................................................................38.3. TO AUTOTUNE CONTOL LOOP LP1....................................................48.4. CASCADE TUNING ...................................................................................58.4.1. Automatic Tuning of a Cascade Loop.........................................................58.4.2. AutotuneParameters ....................................................................................68.4.3. To View the State of Autotune....................................................................78.5. MANUAL TUNING.....................................................................................88.5.1. Setting the cutback values ...........................................................................98.5.2. Integral action and manual reset................................................................108.5.3. To Manually Set PID Values ....................................................................108.5.4. Valve Position Control..............................................................................108.6. GAIN SCHEDULING................................................................................118.6.1. To Use Gain Scheduling ...........................................................................118.6.2. Analogue Value.........................................................................................12
Tuning 2704 Controller
8-2 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00
8. Chapter 8 TuningThis chapter describes how to tune your controller to match the characteristics of the processunder control.There are four topics:• WHAT IS TUNING?
• AUTOMATIC TUNING
• MANUAL TUNING
• GAIN SCHEDULINGThis chapter should be read in conjunction with Chapter 9, Loop Set Up.
8.1. WHAT IS TUNING
In tuning, you match the characteristics of the controller to those of the process beingcontrolled in order to obtain good control. Good control means:
• Stable, ‘straight-line’ control of the PV at setpoint without fluctuation• No overshoot, or undershoot, of the PV setpoint• Quick response to deviations from the setpoint caused by external disturbances, thereby
rapidly restoring the PV to the setpoint value.
Tuning involves calculating and setting the value of the parameters listed in Table 8-1. Theseparameters appear in the Loop Setup (PID) list, see Chapter 9.
Parameter Meaning or Function
Proportionalband
The bandwidth, in display units or %, over which the output power isproportioned between minimum and maximum.
Integral time Determines the time taken by the controller to remove steady-state errorsignals.
Derivative time Determines how strongly the controller will react to the rate-of-change ofthe measured value.
High Cutback The number of display units, above setpoint, at which the controller willincrease the output power, in order to prevent undershoot on cool down.
Low cutback The number of display units, below setpoint, at which the controller willcutback the output power, in order to prevent overshoot on heat up.
Cool gain Only present if cooling has been configured and a module is fitted. Setsthe cooling proportional band, which equals the proportional band valuedivided by the cool gain value.
Table 8-1: Tuning Parameters
2704 Controller Tuning
Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 8-3
8.2. AUTOMATIC TUNING
The 2704 controller uses a one-shot tuner which automatically sets up the initial values of theparameters listed in Table 8-1 on the previous page.
8.2.1. One-shot TuningThe ‘one-shot’ tuner works by switching the output on and off to induce an oscillation in themeasured value. From the amplitude and period of the oscillation, it calculates the tuningparameter values.
If the process cannot tolerate full heating or cooling being applied during tuning, then thelevels can be restricted by setting the autotune high power limit (‘Tune OH’) and autotunelow power limit (‘Tune OL’) in the AUTOTUNE parameters page (Table 8.3.2.). However,the measured value must oscillate to some degree for the tuner to be able to calculate values.
A One-shot Tune can be performed at any time, but normally it is performed only onceduring the initial commissioning of the process. However, if the process under controlsubsequently becomes unstable (because its characteristics have changed), you can re-tuneagain for the new conditions.
It is best to start tuning with the process at ambient conditions and with the SP close to thenormal operating level. This allows the tuner to calculate more accurately the low cutbackand high cutback values which restrict the amount of overshoot, or undershoot.
Tuning 2704 Controller
8-4 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00
8.3. TO AUTOTUNE CONTOL LOOP LP1
In most cases it will only be necessary to carry out the Autotune procedure whencommissioning your controller.
Do This This Is The Display YouShould See
Additional Notes
Set the setpoint to the value at which you will normally operate the process .
1. The controller induces an oscillation in the PV by first turning the output (power) on, andthen off. The first cycle is not complete until the measured value has reached the requiredsetpoint.
2. After two cycles of oscillation the tuning is completed and the tuner switches itself off.
3. When the controller is autotuning the status of autotune is shown periodically on therelevant loop summary
4. The controller then calculates the tuning parameters listed in Table 8-1 and resumesnormal control action.
If you want ‘Proportional only’, ‘PD’, or ‘PI’ control, you should set the Integral timeparameter or derivative time parameter to OFF before commencing the tuning cycle. Theseparameters are found in the Loop Setup (PID) pages, see Chapter 9. The tuner will leavethem off and will not calculate a value for them.
Autotune page is at Level 3by default, but may havebeen promoted to L1 or L2.
The choices are:-LP1LP1ALP1 CascadeThese are repeated forLoops 2 and 3
Note:Text shown in italics is userdefinable in configurationmode and may be differentfrom that shown
1. From any display press
as many times asnecessary to access thepage header menu
2. Press or toselect ‘AUTOTUNE’
3. Press to displaysub-headers
4. Press or toselect ‘Autotune Loop’
5. Press to select theparameter.
6. Press or tochoose the loop to tune
2704 Controller Tuning
Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 8-5
Typical automatic tuning cycle
Calculation of the cutback values
Low cutback and High cutback are values that restrict the amount of overshoot, orundershoot, that occurs during large step changes in PV (for example, under start-upconditions).If either low cutback, or high cutback, is set to ‘Auto’ the values are fixed at three times theproportional band, and are not changed during automatic tuning.
8.4. CASCADE TUNING
In the 2704 controller a cascade loop can be tuned using the autotune feature.
The cascade autotuner tunes to the local setpoint of the auxiliary loop. This value should beset to the value at which the process is typically operated. For example, for a furnacetypically used around 1000oC, set ‘Local SP’ (Aux) to 1000oC. The autotune will take placeat a level below this to ensure that the process operating conditions are not exceeded.
Similarly, since autotune applies the full range of the output signal to the process it may insome cases be desirable to limit this range to protect the process.
Cascade autotune tunes the slave loop first followed by the master. For a more detaileddescription of cascade autotune or tuning of cascade loops manually, see the 2704Engineering Handbook, Part No. HA026933.
8.4.1. Automatic Tuning of a Cascade Loop
1. On the loop overview page, set ‘Local SP’ to the value at which the process typicallyoperates. Alternatively, this value can also be set in the LPx SETUP (SP(Aux)) page.
2. Set ‘Tune OL’ and ‘Tune OH’ (if necessary) to the required limits for the process.These parameters can be found in the AUTOTUNE page.
3. From the AUTOTUNE page header, choose the parameter ‘Autotune Loop’ and select‘LPx (CSD)’.
Cascade control is described in Chapter 9
Time
SetpointPV
Tuning 2704 Controller
8-6 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00
8.4.2. AutotuneParameters
Table Number:
8.3.2.
These parameters allow you to autotunethe loop
AUTOTUNE
Parameter Name Parameter Description Value Default AccessLevel
Tune OL Auto tune low power limit -100 to100%
0 L1
Tune OH Auto tune high power limit -100 to100%
0 L1
Autotune Loop Selects the loop number totune
LP1LP!ALP1 (CSD)LP2LP2ALP2 (CSD)LP3LP3ALP3 (CSD)
L1
Autotune State Shows the current state ofautotune
Not TuningMeasuringNoiseTuning A atSPTuning to SPFindingMinimumFindingMaximumStoring TimeEndCalculatingPIDABORTED
NotTuning
L1 R/O
Tune OP Tune output -100 to 100 L1
CSD Tune State Cascade tuning state OffInitialisingTuning SlaveWaitingWaiting AgainTuning Master
Off L1
2704 Controller Tuning
Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 8-7
8.4.3. To View the State of AutotuneAs autotune progresses, its state is displayed on the loop overview screen and also in theautoune parameter list as follows.
Do This This Is The Display YouShould See
Additional Notes
1. From the previous display
Press to display‘Autotune State
This parameter displays thestate of Autotuning. Thechoices are:
Not TuningMeasuring NoiseTuning A at SPTuning to SPFinding MinimumFinding MaximumStoring TimeCalculating PID EndABORTED
In the relevant loopsummary, a message belowthe banner is periodicallyflashed with the loop beingtuned. A second messageflashes the state of tuningfrom the text above.
Tuning 2704 Controller
8-8 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00
8.5. MANUAL TUNING
If for any reason automatic tuning gives unsatisfactory results, you can tune the controllermanually. There are a number of standard methods for manual tuning. The one describedhere is the Ziegler-Nichols method.
With the process at its normal running conditions:
1. Set the Integral Time and the Derivative Time to OFF. 2. Set High Cutback and Low Cutback to ‘Auto’. 3. Ignore the fact that the PV may not settle precisely at the setpoint. 4. If the PV is stable, reduce the proportional band so that the PV just starts to oscillate. If
PV is already oscillating, increase the proportional band until it just stops oscillating.Allow enough time between each adjustment for the loop to stabilise. Make a note of theproportional band value ‘B’ and the period of oscillation ‘T’.
5. Set the proportional band, integral time and derivative time parameter values according to
the calculations given in Table 8-2.
Type of control Proportionalband ‘Pb’
Integral time ‘ti’ Derivative time‘td’
Proportional only 2xB OFF OFF
P + I control 2.2xB 0.8xT OFF
P + I + D control 1.7xB 0.5xT 0.12xT
Table 8-2: Tuning Values
Note:-The parameters listed in the above table will be found under the heading Loop Setup. Thisheading is also described in the following chapter.
2704 Controller Tuning
Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 8-9
8.5.1. Setting the cutback valuesThe above procedure sets up the parameters for optimum steady state control. Ifunacceptable levels of overshoot or undershoot occur during start-up, or for large stepchanges in PV, then manually set the cutback parameters.
Proceed as follows:
1. Set the low and high cutback values to three proportional bandwidths (that is to say, Lcb= Hcb = 3 x Pb).
2. Note the level of overshoot, or undershoot, that occurs for large PV changes (see thediagrams below).
In example (a) increase Low Cutback by the overshoot value. In example (b) reduce LowCutback by the undershoot value.
Example (a)
Example (b)
Where the PV approaches setpoint from above, you can set High Cutback in a similarmanner.
PV
Time
Setpoint
PV
Undershoot
SetpointOvershoot
Tuning 2704 Controller
8-10 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00
8.5.2. Integral action and manual resetIn a full three-term controller (that is, a PID controller), the integral term automaticallyremoves steady state errors from the setpoint. If the controller is set up to work in two-termmode (that is, PD mode), the integral term will be set to ‘OFF’. Under these conditions themeasured value may not settle precisely at setpoint. When the integral term is set to ‘OFF’the parameter manual reset appears in the Loop Setup (PID) page. This parameter representsthe value of the power output that will be delivered when the error is zero. You must set thisvalue manually in order to remove the steady state error.
8.5.3. To Manually Set PID ValuesSee Section 9.2 ‘To Set Up PID Parameters ‘.
8.5.4. Valve Position ControlSee section 9.7 ‘Control of Valve Positioning Motors’, for an explanation of the additionalparameters required for motorised valves and how to set the values of these parameters.
2704 Controller Tuning
Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 8-11
8.6. GAIN SCHEDULING
Gain scheduling is the automatic transfer of control between one set of PID values andanother. In the case of the 2704 controller, this is done at a presettable value of SP, PV Erroror OP. This is determined in configuration level. Gain scheduling is used for the moredifficult to control processes which exhibit large changes in their response time or sensitivityat, for example, high and low PVs, or when heating or cooling.
The 2704 controller has three sets of PID values. You can select the active set from either adigital input, or from a parameter in the Loop Setup(PID) page, see Chapter 9, or you cantransfer automatically in gain scheduling mode. The transfer is bumpless and will not disturbthe process being controlled .
8.6.1. To Use Gain SchedulingIf gain scheduling has been enabled in configuration level:-
Do This This Is The Display YouShould See
Additional Notes
You must now set up the three sets of PID values. The values can be manually set, orautomatically tuned as described earlier in this chapter. When tuning automatically you musttune three times, once below the switching point ‘1/2 Boundary’ once between 1/2 Boundary’and ‘2/3 Boundary’ ‘ and finally above ‘2/3 Boundary’.
Alternatives are LP 2 andLP 3. These only appearin the list if the loops areconfigured
LPx SETUP page is atLevel 3 by default but mayhave been promoted to L1or L2.
The choices are PID Sets1 to 3.
To change the active PID
set, press to select,
then press or tochange.
1. From any display press as many times as necessaryto access the page headermenu
2. Press or to select‘LP1 SETUP’
3. Press to display sub-headers
4. Press or to select‘PID’
5. Press to show theparameter list.
6. Press again to select‘Active PID Set’ .
7. Press or to selectthe PID set to use for gainscheduling
Tuning 2704 Controller
8-12 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00
8.6.2. Analogue Value
The Analogue Value is a customisable parameter available in the PID (and PID Aux) pageswhich provides the user with additional flexibility when designing a control strategy. Thisparameter is called Analogue Value (An Value 1 to 3). It is available for each PID set ifGain Scheduling has been configured and for each loop configured . It can be ‘soft wired’ inconfiguration mode to perform a specific function relevant to the particular process beingcontrolled. Examples include: Output Power Limit, SP Feedforward Trim, etc,.
2704 Controller Loop Set Up
Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 9-1
9. CHAPTER 9 LOOP SET UP............................................... 29.1. WHAT IS LOOP SET UP ...........................................................................29.2. TO SET UP PID PARAMETERS ..............................................................39.2.1. To Manually Set The PID And Other Tuning Parameters ..........................49.2.2. PID Page .....................................................................................................59.2.3. PID (Aux) Page...........................................................................................69.3. TO ADJUST SETPOINT PARAMETERS................................................79.3.1. LP1 SETUP (SP Aux) Page........................................................................89.4. CASCADE CONTROL ...............................................................................99.4.1. Overview.....................................................................................................99.4.2. Simple Cascade...........................................................................................99.4.3. Cascade with Feedforward ..........................................................................99.4.4. Auto/Manual Operation ..............................................................................99.4.5. Cascade Parameters LP1 SETUP (Cascade Page) ..................................109.5. RATIO CONTROL ...................................................................................119.5.1. Introduction...............................................................................................119.5.2. Basic Ratio Control...................................................................................119.5.3. Setpoint Tracking......................................................................................129.5.4. Ratio Control Parameters LP1 SETUP (Ratio Page) ..............................129.6. OVERRIDE CONTROL...........................................................................139.6.1. Introduction:..............................................................................................139.6.2. Simple Override ........................................................................................139.6.3. Override Control Parameters LP1 SETUP (Override Page) ....................149.7. CONTROL OF VALVE POSITIONING MOTORS..............................159.7.1. Motor Parameters......................................................................................159.7.2. Commissioning the Motorised Valve Controller.......................................169.8. OUTPUT PARAMETERS ........................................................................179.9. LP 1 SETUP (DIAGNOSTIC PAGE).......................................................19
Loop Set Up 2704 Controller
9-2 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00
9. Chapter 9 Loop Set Up
9.1. WHAT IS LOOP SET UP
The 2704 controller can have up to three control loops, and each control loop will have anauxiliary loop if cascade, ratio and override control has been configured. The Loop Setuppages allow you to set up the parameters associated with the operation of each of these loops.The Loop Setup pages are divided into a number of sub-headers - briefly described below:-
LP1 Setup (SP Page) These parameters are associated with the setpoint of aparticular loop
LP1 Setup (SP(Aux)Page) These parameters are associated with the setpoint of theauxiliary loop.
LP1 Setup (Cascade Page) These parameters only appear if the control loop isconfigured for cascade control.
LP1 Setup (Ratio Page) These parameters only appear if the control loop isconfigured for ratio control.
LP1 Setup (Override Page) These parameters only appear if the control loop isconfigured for override control.
LP1 Setup (PID Page) These parameters allow you to set up the three term or PIDvalues for the selected loop. See also Chapter 8
LP1 Setup (PID Aux) Page These parameters allow you to set up the three term or PIDvalues for the selected auxiliary loop. See also Chapter 8
LP1 Setup (Motor Page) These parameters allow you to set up the values for a valvepositioning output when the selected loop is configured formotorised valve control. See also Chapter 8
LP1 Setup (Output Page) These parameters allow you to set up the values for theoutput when the selected loop is configured for analogue ordigital control outputs.
LP1 Setup (DiagnosticPage)
These parameters are for diagnostic purposes on the selectedloop.
LP1 Setup (Diag Aux) Page These parameters are for diagnostic purposes on the selectedauxiliary loop.
Each header listed above is repeated for each control loop configured.
Notes:1. Text shown in italics is user definable in configuration mode and may be different from
that shown2. Since this chapter may be read in conjunction with the previous chapter - ‘Tuning’ - the
manual setting of PID parameters is described first.
2704 Controller Loop Set Up
Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 9-3
9.2. TO SET UP PID PARAMETERS
The PID parameters are Proportional Band, Integral Time and Derivative Time. Thevalue of these parameters are dependant upon the characteristics of the application undercontrol. Control stability is also achieved by setting other parameters such as Cutback,Manual Reset, Relative Cool Gain, Feedforward, etc,. Further information is available inChapter 8, Tuning.
For processes where the rate of change varies significantly over the operating range, i.e. non-linear processes, a single set of tuning parameters may not be adequate. The 2704 controllerallows three sets of tuning parameters to be held in memory. Each set can be active atdifferent points in the range to provide best control at different process values. Thesetransition points are set using the parameters 1/2 Boundary and 2/3 Boundary. This is alsoreferred to as Gain Scheduling.
A customisable parameter is available in the PID (and PID Aux) pages which provides theuser with additional flexibility when designing a control strategy. This parameter is calledAnalogue Value (An Value 1 to 3). It is available for each PID set if Gain Scheduling hasbeen configured and for each loop configured . It can be ‘soft wired’ in configuration modeto perform a specific function relevant to the particular process being controlled. Examplesinclude: Output Power Limit, SP Feedforward Trim, etc,.
Loop Set Up 2704 Controller
9-4 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00
9.2.1. To Manually Set The PID And Other Tuning Parameters
Do This This Is The Display YouShould See
Additional Notes
Alternatives are Loop 2and Loop 3. These onlyappear in the list if theloops are configured.
Available at L3 but mayhave been promoted to L1or L2.
Further parameters may beset up in the same way.These are listed togetherwith an explanation of theirfunction in the followingtable
Note:Text shown in italics is user definable in configurationmode and may be different from that shown
R/O. PID set 1 is onlydisplayed if gainscheduling has beenenabled in configurationlevel.
Shows the working PIDset based upon PV and1/2 & 2/3 boundaries.
The choices are:PID Set 1PID Set 2PID Set 3
The number Following‘Prop Band’ shows thegain set being edited
The proportional band canbe displayed in % or inengineering units, and isadjustable between 1 and9999.9.
1. From any display press as many times as necessaryto access the page headermenu
2. Press or to select‘LP1 SETUP’
3. Press to display thesub-headers
4. Press or to selectPID
3. Press to show theparameter list.
4. Press or tochoose ‘Prop Band 1’
5. Press to select PropBand 1
6. Press or to setthe value of theproportional band to bestored in Set 1.
2704 Controller Loop Set Up
Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 9-5
9.2.2. PID Page
Table Number:
9.2.2.
These parameters allow you to set up the PID sets LP1 SETUP
(PID Page)
Parameter Name Parameter Description Value Default AccessLevel
Active PID Set The PID set in current use Set 1 to 3 R/O
Prop Band 1 Proportional Band Set 1 1 to 9999.9eng units
L1
Integral 1 Integral Time Set 1 Off to 999.9 L1
Derivative 1 Derivative Time Set 1 secs or mins L1
Cutback Low 1 Cutback Low Set 1 Auto to disp. L1
Cutback High 1 Cutback High Set 1 range L1
Manual Reset 1 Manual Reset Set 1 (onlyapplies to a PD controller)
Off, -99.9 to+100
L1
Cool Gain 1 Relative channel 1/channel2 Gain Set 1 (e.g. cooling).Only present if ch 1 and ch 2are in the same loop
0.1 to 10 L1
An Value 1 Analogue value 1 (see 9.2) L3
The above eight parameters are repeated for set 2 and again for set 3 if the number of PIDsets has been configured to 2 or 3 respectively.
FF Offset Feedforward Offset Value L3
FF Prop Band Feedforward ProportionalBand. This parametercontrols the amount that thePID can affect the output
L3
FF Trim Limit Feedforward Trim Limit L3
Remote FFwd Remote feedforward L3
1/2 Boundary Sets the level at which PIDset 1 changes to PID set 2
Range units L3
2/3 Boundary Sets the level at which PIDset 1 changes to PID set 2
Range units L3
Loop Brk Time Loop break time OffOn
L3
AutoDroop Comp Manual reset when Integralturned off
ManualCalc
L3
Control Hold Control hold flag. Freezesthe control output
NoYes
L3
Integral Hold Integral hold flag No
Yes
L3
Loop Set Up 2704 Controller
9-6 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00
9.2.3. PID (Aux) Page
Table Number:
9.2.3.
These parameters allow you to set up thePID sets
LP1 SETUP
PID(Aux) Page
Parameter Name Parameter Description Value Default AccessLevel
Active PID Set The PID set currently beingused
PID Set 1 to3
L1
Prop Band 1 Proportional Band Set 1 1 to 9999.9eng units
L1
Integral 1 Integral Time Set 1 Off to
999.9 secsor mins
L1
Derivative 1 Derivative Time Set 1 Off to
999.9 secsor mins
L1
Cutback Low 1 Cutback Low Set 1 Auto todisplay limit
L1
Cutback High 1 Cutback High Set 1 Auto todisplay limit
L1
Manual Reset 1 Manual Reset Set 1 (onlyapplies to a PD controller)
Off, -99.9 to+100
L1
Cool Gain 1 Relative channel 1/channel2 Gain Set 1 (e.g. cooling.Only present if ch 1 and ch 2are in the same loop)
0.1 to 10 L1
An Value 1 Analogue value 1 (see 9.2) L3
The above seven parameters are repeated for set 2 and again for set 3 if the number of PIDsets has been configured to 2 or 3 respectively.
1/2 Boundary Sets the level at which PIDset 1 changes to PID set 2
Range units L3
2/3 Boundary Sets the level at which PIDset 1 changes to PID set 2
Range units L3
Control Hold Aux. Control hold flag.Freezes the control output
NoYes
L3
Integral Hold Aux. Integral hold flag No
Yes
L3
The tables in sections 9.2.2 and 9.2.3 are repeated for Loop 2 and Loop 3 if these havebeen configured
This table does not appear if the Loop Type is Ratio.
2704 Controller Loop Set Up
Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 9-7
9.3. TO ADJUST SETPOINT PARAMETERS
The method of access to parameters associated with setpoints is identical to that alreadydescribed. The list of these parameters is given in the table below:-
Table Number:
9.3.
This list allows you to select the setpoint to use, itsvalue, setpoint limits and trims for the main loop.
LP1 SETUP
(SP Page)
Parameter Name Parameter Description Value Default AccessLevel
SP Select Internal setpoint select Setpoint 1
Setpoint 2
L1
SP1 Low Limit Setpoint 1 low limit L3
SP1 High Limit Setpoint 1 high limit L3
Setpoint 1 Setpoint 1 value L1
SP2 Low Limit Setpoint 2 low limit Rangeunits
L3
SP2 High Limit Setpoint 2 high limit L3
Setpoint 2 Setpoint 2 value L1
Disable Rt Lim Setpoint Rate limit disable No
Yes
L3
Rate Limit Val Rate of change of setpoint Off torangeunits
L3
Trim Lo Lim Local setpoint trim low limit L3
Trim Hi Lim Local setpoint trim high limit Rangeunits
L3
Local SP Trim Allows a trim value to beapplied to the remote SP
L1
Enable Rem SP Remote setpoint enable No
Yes
L1
Remote SP Remote setpoint value Rangeunits
L1
HBk Type SP rate limit holdback type Off
Low
High
Band
L3
HBk Value SP rate limit holdback value Displayrange
R/O
HBk Status SP rate limit holdback status Off
Holdback
L3
Loop Set Up 2704 Controller
9-8 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00
9.3.1. LP1 SETUP (SP Aux) Page
Table Number:
9.3.1
This list allows you to select the setpoint valueand setpoint limits specific to the auxiliaryloop.
LP1 SETUP
(SP Aux) Page
Parameter Name Parameter Description Value Default AccessLevel
SP Low Limit Auxiliary setpoint 1 low limit Rangeunits
L3
SP High Limit Auxiliary setpoint 1 high limit Rangeunits
L3
OVR SP Trim Override loop setpoint trim Rangeunits
L3. OnlyappearswhenOverridecontrol isconfigured
Local SP The setpoint which thecontroller reverts to whennot in cascade, ratio oroverride
Rangeunits
L1
Working SP The current value of thesetpoint in use
Rangeunits
L1
This table does not appear if the Loop Type is Ratio.
2704 Controller Loop Set Up
Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 9-9
9.4. CASCADE CONTROL
9.4.1. OverviewCascade control is a technique used to enable processes with long time constants to becontrolled with the fastest possible response to process disturbances, including setpointchanges, whilst still minimising the potential for overshoot. It is a combination of two PIDcontrollers, where the output signal from one (the master) forms the setpoint for the other (theslave). For cascade control to be effective the slave loop should be more responsive than themaster.
9.4.2. Simple CascadeThe main process is controlled using the master PID loop, the output of which is used todetermine the setpoint of the slave. The implementation of cascade control in the 2704 isavailable as a standard option. ie ; it is not necessary to order a dual loop controller toperform cascade control.
9.4.3. Cascade with FeedforwardAn available option with cascade control is feedforward. It allows either the master PV,master SP or user defined variable to be fed forward so that it directly influences the slavesetpoint. The master PID output contribution of the slave setpoint is limited by the trim limitset in engineering units. This parameter also adjusts the gain of the feedforward path.A typical application for SP feedforward could be in a heat treatment furnace, where it can beused to extend the life of heating elements by limiting their maximum operating temperature.An application using PV feedforward could be in autoclaves or reactor vessels where it issometimes required to protect the product from excessive temperature gradients (also referredto as Delta T Control).
9.4.3.1. Standard Feedforward
Standard feedforward is used if there is a requirement for some additional parameter, forexample an analogue input, to trim the master PID output value before the slave setpoint isapplied. An application may be a liquid temperature control system using cascade control ofheater temperature where variations in control rate can be directly fed forward into the slaveloop, modifying heater temperature and giving rapid compensation
9.4.4. Auto/Manual OperationAuto/Manual operates on both master and slave loops.When the controller is placed in manual the slave working setpoint will track the value of theslave process value continually, therefore ensuring bumpless transfer.When cascade is deactivated the master loop will monitor the setpoint of the slave loop andprovide a smooth transition of output power when the loop moves back to cascade mode.
Loop Set Up 2704 Controller
9-10 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00
Figure 9-1: Cascade with Feedforward
9.4.5. Cascade Parameters LP1 SETUP (Cascade Page)
Table Number:
9.4.5.
This list allows you to set upparameters specific to cascadecontrollers
LP1 SETUP
(Cascade Page)
Parameter Name Parameter Description Value Default AccessLevel
Disable CSD Cascade disable status Off
On
L1
CSD FF Value Cascade feedforward valuei.e. The value being fedforward
Range ofsignalbeing fedforward
L3
CSD FF Trim Lim Cascade feedforward trimlimit i.e. The amount themaster output can betrimmed up and down.
Range ofslave loop
L3
Master OP Cascade master PID outputpower
Range ofslave loop
R/O
Csd TrimLim
Master PIDLoop
FeedforwardSelection
Slave PIDLoop
ControlOutput
MasterPV
MasterSP
RemoteInput
SlavePV
Csd FFValue
MasterOP
2704 Controller Loop Set Up
Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 9-11
9.5. RATIO CONTROL
9.5.1. IntroductionRatio Control is a technique used to control a process variable at a setpoint which iscalculated as a proportion of a second (lead) input. The ratio setpoint determines theproportion of the lead value that is to be used as the actual control setpoint. The ratio setpointcan be applied as either a multiplier or as a divisor to the second input.A typical application is in gas fired furnaces where in order to achieve efficient combustion,the gas and air flow supplied to the burners needs to be maintained at a constant ratio.
9.5.2. Basic Ratio ControlThe 2704 contains a ratio control function block (function blocks are explained in theEngineering Manual Part No. HAxx) which can be used in any control loop. Figure 9.2shows a block diagram of a simple ratio controller. The lead PV is multiplied or divided bythe ratio setpoint to calculate the desired control setpoint. Prior to the setpoint calculation,the ratio setpoint can be offset by the ratio trim value and must obey the overall ratio setpointoperating limits. Another useful feature of the is the automatic calculation of the actualmeasured ratio which is then available to be displayed on the controller front panel.
Figure 9-2: Simple Ratio Control Block Diagram
Main ControlLoop
Main Process PV
Lead PVZ/^
Ratio SP
Ratio Trim
Ratio SP Limits
Control OP
Local TrimRange Hi
Range Lo
++
Working Ratio SP
Ratio Hi Limit
Ratio Lo Limit
Loop Set Up 2704 Controller
9-12 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00
9.5.3. Setpoint TrackingWhen the control loop is placed in manual or ratio has been deselected, setpoint tracking canbe used to recalculate the actual achieved ratio, thereby ensuring bumpless transfer betweenmodes. If the input from the lead process value at any time becomes invalid, then theworking setpoint of the loop will remain at its current value
9.5.4. Ratio Control Parameters LP1 SETUP (Ratio Page)
Table Number:
9.5.4.
This list allows you to set up parametersspecific to ratio controllers
LP1 SETUP
(Ratio Page)
Parameter Name Parameter Description Value Default AccessLevel
Lead PV The value of the leadprocess variable
L1
Measured Ratio Measured Ratio R/O
Ratio WSP Ratio working setpoint R/O
Ratio Lo Lim Ratio setpoint low limit L3
Ratio Hi Lim Ratio setpoint high limit L3
Ratio SP Ratio setpoint L1
Enable Ratio Ratio enable No
Yes
L1
Ratio Trim Ratio trim value L1
2704 Controller Loop Set Up
Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 9-13
9.6. OVERRIDE CONTROL
9.6.1. Introduction:Override Control allows a secondary control loop to override the main control output in orderto prevent an undesirable operating condition. The override function can be configured tooperate in either minimum, maximum or select mode.A typical example can be implemented in a heat treatment furnace with one thermocoupleattached to the workpiece, and another situated close to the heating elements. Control of thefurnace during the heating up period is regulated by the override (heating element)temperature controller which provides a safeguard against overheating. Control of thefurnace will switch over to the workpiece temperature controller at some point when thetemperature is near to its target setpoint. The exact point of switchover is determinedautomatically by the controller, and will be dependent on the selected PID terms.
9.6.2. Simple OverrideOverride control is available with analogue, time proportioning and ON/OFF control outputs.It is not available with valve position outputs. Figure 9.3 shows a simple override controlloop. The main and override controller outputs are fed to a low signal selector. The overridecontroller setpoint is set to a value somewhere above the normal operating setpoint, butbelow any safety interlocks.There is one Auto Manual switch for both loops. In manual mode the control outputs of bothloops track the actual output therefore ensuring bumpless transfer when auto is selected.
Figure 9-3: Simple Override Control
Min select
Main ControlLoop
OverrideControlLoop
ControlOutput
Main OP
Override OP
Override SP
Main SP
Main PV
Override PV
Loop Set Up 2704 Controller
9-14 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00
9.6.3. Override Control Parameters LP1 SETUP (Override Page)
Table Number:
9.6.3.
This list allows you to set up parametersspecific to override controllers
LP1 SETUP
(Override Page)
Parameter Name Parameter Description Value Default AccessLevel
OVR Target SP Override target setpoint Displayrange
L1
Disable OVR Disable override control No
Yes
L1
Active Loop Displays the loop which iscontrolling at any time
Main Loop
Aux Loop
L1
OVR SP Trim Override loop setpoint trim Rangelimit
L3
Main OP Override main output -100 to100
R/O
Override OP Override output -100 to100
R/O
2704 Controller Loop Set Up
Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 9-15
9.7. CONTROL OF VALVE POSITIONING MOTORS
The 2704 controller can be configured for motorised valve control as an alternative to thestandard PID control algorithm. This algorithm is designed specifically for positioningmotorised valves and operates in boundless mode, which does not require a position feedbackpotentiometer for control purposes
An example on how to connect a motorised valve controller is given in Chapter 2 section2.4.2. The control is performed by delivering open, or close, pulses in response to the controldemand signal via raise and lower relay or triac outputs.
The following page will appear if your controller is configured for motorised valve control.
9.7.1. Motor Parameters
Table Number:
9.7.1.
This list allows you to set up the motor interfaceparameters for a valve positioning output. Thispage only appears if a motor valve positioningcontroller is configured
LP1 SETUP
(Motor Page)
ParameterName
Parameter Description Value Default AccessLevel
Travel Time This parameter is set tomatch the time taken for themotor to travel from fullyclosed to fully open
0:00:00.1 0:00:60:0 L3
Inertia This parameter is set tomatch the inertia (if any) ofthe motor
Off to0:00:00.1
0:00:20:0 L3
Backlash This parameter compensatesfor any backlash which mayexist in the linkages
Off to0:00:00.1
0:00:20:0 L3
Min Pulse Time Sets the minimum on time ofthe signal which drives themotor
Auto to0:00:00.1
Auto =0:00:00:2
L3
VP Pot Lo Lim Valve position low limit 0 to Pot Hi L3
VP Pot Hi Lim Valve position high limit 0 to Pot Lo L3
VP SBrk OP Sensor break action forbounded control
0 to 100% L3
VP SBrk Action Sets the sensor break actionfor a valve position controllerwhen no feedbackpotentiometer is used.
Reset
Up
Down
L3
Valve Position Indicates the position of thevalve
0 to 100% R/O
Enable Pot Cal Pot input calibration enable Off On L3
Loop Set Up 2704 Controller
9-16 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00
9.7.2. Commissioning the Motorised Valve Controller
1. Measure the time taken for the valve to be raised from its fully closed to its fully openposition and enter this as the value in seconds into the ‘Travel Time’ parameter.
2. Set all the other parameters to the default values shown in 9.7.1.
The controller can then be tuned using any of the automatic, or manual, tuning proceduresdescribed in Chapter 8. As before, the tuning process, either automatic or manual, involvessetting the values of the parameters in Table 9.7.1. The only difference with boundlesscontrol is that the derivative term, although present, will have no effect.
9.7.2.1. Adjusting the minimum pulse-time
The default value of 0.2 seconds is satisfactory for most processes. If, however, after tuningthe process, the valve activity is excessively high, with constant oscillation between raise andlower pulses, the minimum on-time can be increased.
The minimum on-time determines how accurately the valve can be positioned and thereforethe control accuracy. The shorter the time, the more precise the control. However, if thetime is set too short, process noise will cause an excessively busy valve.
9.7.2.2. Inertia and backlash settings
The default values are satisfactory for most processes, i.e. ‘Off’.
Inertia is the time taken for the valve to stop after the output pulse is turned off. If thiscauses a control problem, the inertia time needs to be determined and then entered into the‘Inertia’ parameter. The inertia time is subtracted from the raise and lower output pulsetimes, so that the valve moves the correct distance for each pulse.
Backlash is the output pulse time required to reverse the direction of the valve, i.e. the timetaken to overcome the mechanical backlash of the linkages. If the backlash is sufficient tocause a control problem, then the backlash time needs to be determined and then entered intothe ‘Backlash’ parameter.
The above two values are not part of the automatic tuning procedure and must be enteredmanually.
2704 Controller Loop Set Up
Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 9-17
9.8. OUTPUT PARAMETERS
Table Number:
9.8.
This list allows you to set up the parameterswhich control the control output to the plant
LP1 SETUP
(Output Page)
Parameter Name Parameter Description Value Default AccessLevel
Loop Mode On/Off control output only.Allows the controller to beswitched into manual
Auto
Manual
Auto L1
OP Low Limit Sets a low limit on ananalogue output signal
-100% to100%
L3
OP High Limit Sets a high limit on ananalogue output signal
-100% to100%
L3
OP Rate Limit Sets the rate at which theoutput value changes
Off to99.99%/sec
L3
OP Rate Lim En Output rate limit enable Off
On
Off L3
Forced OP Sets the output value whenthe controller is switched tomanual - alternative tobumpless transfer
-100% to100%
L3
SBrk OP Sets the level of the outputunder sensor breakconditions
-100% to100%
L3
CH1 OP Reads the current value ofchannel 1 output
-100% to100%
R/O
Ch1 Hysteresis Only shown if the outputrelay 1 is configured ason/off. It sets the differencebetween relay on and relayoff.
Off to9999.9
L3
Ch1 Min Pulse Output minimum on time(on/off control)
The above three parameters are repeated for channel 2
Deadband Deadband between ch1 andch2 - only applies if both ch1and ch2 are configured
Off to100.0
L3
Target OP Target output power -100 to100%
L1
Rem Lo OP Lim Remote low power limit -100% to100%
L3
Rem Hi OP Lim Remote high power limit -100% to100%
L3
Loop Set Up 2704 Controller
9-18 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00
Power FF Val Power feedforward
Only shown when powerfeedforward is enabled inconfig level. It provides ameasure of the valueapplied to the outputdemand to compensate forsupply voltage variations
R/O
Ena OP Track Output track enable No
Yes
L3
OP Track Value Track input -100 to100
L3
Ena Aux OP Trk Auxiliary Output track enable No
Yes
L3
Aux OP Trk Val Auxiliary Track input -100 to100
L3
2704 Controller Loop Set Up
Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 9-19
9.9. LP 1 SETUP (DIAGNOSTIC PAGE)
This page is read only and provides information on the current operating conditions of thecontrol loop. It is used for diagnostic purposes.
Table Number:
9.9.
This list allows you to interrogateoperating conditions of the loop
LP 1 SETUP
(Diagnostic ,Page)
Parameter Name Parameter Description Value Default AccessLevel
PV Process Variable Displayrange
L1
Aux PV Auxiliary Process Variable Displayrange
L1
Working SP The value of the workingsetpoint
Displayrange
L1
Working OP The value of the workingoutput
-100 to100
L1
Error Value of main loop error
(PV - SP) or (SP-PV)
Displayrange
L1
Aux Error Value of the auxiliary looperror (PV - SP) or (SP-PV)
-9999 to9999
R/O
P OP Proportional component ofthe output
-999 to9999
R/O
Aux P OP Proportional component ofthe auxiliary loop output
-999 to9999
R/O
I OP Integral component of theoutput
-999 to9999
R/O
Aux I OP Integral component of theauxiliary loop output
-999 to9999
R/O
D OP Derivative component of theoutput
-999 to9999
R/O
Aux D OP Derivative component of theauxiliary loop output
-999 to9999
R/O
FF OP Feedforward component ofoutput
-9999 to9999
R/O
SRL Complete Setpoint rate limit complete R/O
VP Velocity VP output velocity -100 to100
R/O
Loop Brk Stat Loop break status flag No
Yes
R/O
Loop Set Up 2704 Controller
9-20 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00
Ext FBack External feedback ExtFb LoLim toExtFbHigh Lim
L3
Aux Fback Auxiliary external feedback Pwr LowLim to PwrHigh Lim
L3
2704 Controller Controller Applications
Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 10-1
10. CHAPTER 10 CONTROLLER APPLICATIONS............... 210.1. ZIRCONIA - CARBON POTENTIAL CONTROL ...............................310.1.1. Temperature Control .................................................................................310.1.2. Carbon Potential Control ..........................................................................310.1.3. Sooting Alarm...........................................................................................310.1.4. Automatic Probe Cleaning ........................................................................310.1.5. Enriching Gas Correction..........................................................................310.1.6. Example Of Carbon Potential Controller Wiring......................................410.2. TO VIEW AND ADJUST ZIRCONIA PARAMETERS........................510.2.1. Zirconia Parameters ..................................................................................610.3. HUMIDITYCONTROL ............................................................................810.3.1. Overview...................................................................................................810.3.2. Example Of Humidity Controller Wiring..................................................910.3.3. Temperature Control Of An Environmental Chamber ............................1010.3.4. Humidity Control Of An Environmental Chamber..................................1010.4. TO VIEW AND ADJUST HUMIDITY PARAMETERS.....................1110.4.1. Humidity Parameters...............................................................................12
Controller Applications 2704 Controller
10-2 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00
10. Chapter 10 Controller ApplicationsThe 2704 controller contains control blocks specifically designed to suit a number ofdifferent applications.Examples are:-Carbon Potential, Oxygen or Dew Point control using Zirconia probesHumidity control using wet and dry platinum resistance thermometers
About this chapter
This chapter gives general descriptions (which are not intended to be of a particularinstallation) of the use of the 2704 controller in the above applications.
◊ Brief description and terminology applications using zirconia probes
◊ An example wiring diagram for carbon potential control
◊ Viewing and adjusting the parameters for a carbon potential controller
◊ Brief description of humidity control
◊ An example wiring diagram for humidity control
◊ Viewing and adjusting the parameters for a humidity controller
2704 Controller Controller Applications
Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 10-3
10.1. ZIRCONIA - CARBON POTENTIAL CONTROL
A dual loop 2704 controller is required to control temperature of the process on one loop andcarbon potential on the other. The controller is often a programmer which generatestemperature and carbon potential profiles synchronised to a common timebase. In thissection it is assumed that a programmer is used.
10.1.1. Temperature ControlThe sensor input of the temperature loop may come from the zirconia probe but it is commonfor a separate thermocouple to be used. The controller provides a heating output which maybe connected to gas burners or thyristors to control electrical heating elements. In someapplications a cooling output may also be connected to a circulation fan or exhaust damper.
10.1.2. Carbon Potential ControlThe zirconia probe generates a millivolt signal based on the ratio of oxygen concentrations onthe reference side of the probe (outside the furnace) to the amount of oxygen in the furnace.The controller uses the temperature and carbon potential signals to calculate the actualpercentage of carbon in the furnace. This second loop generally has two outputs. One outputis connected to a valve which controls the amount of an enrichment gas is supplied to thefurnace. The second output controls the level of dilution air.
10.1.3. Sooting AlarmIn addition to other alarms which may be detected by the controller (see also Chapter 7‘Alarm Operation’), the 2704 can trigger an alarm when the atmospheric conditions are suchthat carbon will be deposited as soot on all surfaces inside the furnace.
10.1.4. Automatic Probe CleaningThe 2704 has a probe clean and recovery strategy that can be programmed to occur betweenbatches or manually requested. A short blast of compressed air is used to remove any sootand other particles that may have accumulated on the probe. Once the cleaning has beencompleted the time taken for the probe to recover is measured. If the recovery time is toolong this indicates that the probe is ageing and replacement or refurbishment is due. Duringthe cleaning and recovery cycle, the %C reading is frozen thereby ensuring continuousfurnace operation.
10.1.5. Enriching Gas CorrectionA gas analyser may be used to determine the CO concentration of the enriching gas. If a 4-20mA output is available from the analyser, it can be fed into the 2704 to automaticallyadjust the calculated % carbon reading. Alternatively, this value can be entered manually.
Controller Applications 2704 Controller
10-4 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00
10.1.6. Example Of Carbon Potential Controller Wiring
In the above example the following modules are fitted. This will change from installation toinstallation:
Module 1 Dual triac or relay to drive motorised valveModule 3 Dual PV Input ModuleStandard Digital I/O Used as logic input for manual probe clean and outputs for
solenoid valve drivesStandard PV Input For the temperature control thermocouple inputStandard Analogue Input For gas analyserStandard Relay Output For sooting alarm
Figure 10-1: An Example of 2704 Wiring for Carbon Potential Control
Zirconia probethermocouple
N
L
BB
BA
BC
2D
2B
2A
2C
1D
1B
1A
1C
HF
HD
HE
JF
JD
JE
D8
E2
E1
AC
AA
AB
HB
HA
HC
JB
JA
JC
D5
D4
D3
D1
DC
D2
D7
D6
V-
V1
VH
V+
6D
6C
6B
6A
5D
5C
5B
5A
4D
4C
4B
4A
3B
3A
3C
3D+
-
ZirconiaVolt
Source
+
-
Motorised ValveProbe CleanDemand
SootingAlarm
EnrichmentGas
DilutionAir
Temperaturecontrol
thermocouple
GasAnalyser
Powersupply
Power supply forvalve drive
CoolingSolenoid
+
-
Note: The +veof the voltsource must beconnected tothe -ve of thethermocouple
2704 Controller Controller Applications
Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 10-5
10.2. TO VIEW AND ADJUST ZIRCONIA PARAMETERS
Do This This Is The Display YouShould See
Additional Notes
This selects the pageheader which contains thezirconia parameters
3. Press to display theparameter list
Read only display ofZirconia Control ProcessValue.
7. Repeat this procedure for all Zirconia parameters .
The full list of parameters available under this list header is shown in the following table
1. From any display press as many times as necessaryto access the page headermenu
2. Press or to select‘ZIRCONIA PROBE’
4. Press or to scrollto the required parameter inthe list
5. Press to select theparameter
6. Press or to changethe value
Controller Applications 2704 Controller
10-6 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00
10.2.1. Zirconia Parameters
Table Number:
10.2.1.
This table allows you to view or adjustzirconia probe parameters
ZIRCONIA PROBE
(Options Page)
Parameter Name Parameter Description Value Default AccessLevel
Zirconia Value Zirconia control processvalue
The O2 or dew point valuederived from temperatureand remote gas referenceinputs
Range units R/O
H-CO Reference Gas reference 0.0 to 999.0 20.0 L3
Rem Gas Ref IP Remote gas reference 0.0 to 999.0 L3
Enable Rm H-CO Remote gas enable.
This can be an internalvalue from the user interfaceor remote from an externalsource.
InternalRemote
Internal L3
Working H-CO Working gas reference orprocess factor
0.0 to 999.0 L3 R/O
Process Factor Process Factor is used insome zirconia probes toprovide compensation forthe varying abilities ofdifferent alloys to absorbcarbon.
0.0 to 999.0 L3
Clean Mode Zirconia clean probe input OffOn
Off L3
Clean Freq Zirconia probe cleaninginterval
Off to99:54:00.0
4:00:00:0
L3
Clean Duration Sets the cleaning time 0:00:06.0 to1:39:54.0
0:10:00:0
L3
Max Recvy Time Maximum recovery timeafter purging
0:00:06.0 to0:10:00
0:10:00:0
L3
Min Recvy Time Minimum recovery time afterpurging
Off to 0:00:01to 0:10:00
0:10:00:0
L3
Min Cal Temp Minimum calculation temp.
Sets the minimumtemperature at which thecalculation takes place
-999.0 L3
Probe Offset Zirconia mV offset to 0.0 L3
Temp Offset Sets the temperature offset 2000.0 0.0 L3
2704 Controller Controller Applications
Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 10-7
for the probe
Next Clean Time to next cleaning.(counts down to 0:00:00.0)
0:00:00.1 R/O
Clean State The burn off state of thezirconia probe
InactiveCleaningRecovering
R/O
Clean Output Clean valve output.This is a signal to thepurging air valve during thepurging cycle.
OffOn (when‘Clean State =Cleaning)
Off L3
Probe Status Probe requires cleaning GoodBad
L1
Probe SBrk Probe sensor break NoYes
R/O
Sooting Alarm Probe sooting alarm output GoodBad
R/O
Probe IP Zirconia probe mV input -0.100 to2.000
R/O
Temp IP Zirconia probe temp inputval
Temp range R/O
PV Invalid PV Invalid
This is a boolean which istrue when the temperature isbelow that set by ‘Min CalTemp’.
It may have been wired inconfiguration mode, forexample, to disable the gasvalve
No
Yes
L3
PV Frozen PV Frozen
This is a boolean whichfreezes the PV during apurging cycle.
It may have been wired inconfiguration mode, forexample, to disable controloutput during purging
No
Yes
L3
Controller Applications 2704 Controller
10-8 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00
10.3. HUMIDITY CONTROL
10.3.1. OverviewHumidity (and altitude) control is a standard feature of the 2704 controller. In theseapplications the controller may be configured to generate a setpoint profile (see Chapter 6‘Programmer Operation’).Also the controller may be configured to measure humidity using either the traditionalWet/Dry bulb method (figure 10.2) or it may be interfaced to a solid state sensor.The controller output may be configured to turn a refrigeration compressor on and off,operate a bypass valve, and possibly operate two stages of heating and/or cooling
Figure 10-2: Humidity Control Block
Humidity ControlBlock
Wet RTD
Dry RTD
Wet Bulb Offset
Altitude Compensation
Psychometric Constant
%RH
Sensor Failure
Dew Point
2704 Controller Controller Applications
Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 10-9
10.3.2. Example Of Humidity Controller Wiring
In the above example the following modules are fitted. This will change from installation toinstallation:
Module 1 Analogue or relay to drive dehumidify valveModule 3 PV input module for wet bulb temperature RTDStandard Digital I/O Used as logic outputs for humidify solenoid valve and
temperature control SCRStandard PV Input For the dry bulb RTD used for the temperature control and
humidity calculation
Figure 10-3: Example of Humidity Controller Connections
N
L
BB
BA
BC
2D
2B
2A
2C
1D
1B
1A
1C
HF
HD
HE
JF
JD
JE
D8
E2
E1
AC
AA
AB
HB
HA
HC
JB
JA
JC
D5
D4
D3
D1
DC
D2
D7
D6
V-
V1
VH
V+
6D
6C
6B
6A
5D
5C
5B
5A
4D
4C
4B
4A
3B
3A
3C
3D
Dehumidifyvalve
Dry bulbtemp
HumidifySolenoid
Wet bulbtemp
L
NSCR for
temperaturecontrol
PSU
Drive capability ofdigital outputs 1.5mAusing the internalpower supply or 40mAwith an external supply
Controller Applications 2704 Controller
10-10 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00
10.3.3. Temperature Control Of An Environmental ChamberThe temperature of an environmental chamber is controlled as a single loop with two controloutputs. The heating output time proportions electric heaters, usually via a solid state relay.The cooling output operates a refrigerant valve which introduces cooling into the chamber.The controller automatically calculates when heating or cooling is required.
10.3.4. Humidity Control Of An Environmental ChamberHumidity in a chamber is controlled by adding or removing water vapour. Like thetemperature control loop two control outputs are required, i.e. Humidify and Dehumidify.To humidify the chamber water vapour may be added by a boiler, an evaporating pan or bydirect injection of atomised water.If a boiler is being used adding steam increases the humidity level. The humidify outputfrom the controller regulates the amount of steam from the boiler that is allowed into thechamber.An evaporating pan is a pan of water warmed by a heater. The humidify output from thecontroller humidity regulates the temperature of the water.An atomisation system uses compressed air to spray water vapour directly into the chamber.The humidify output of the controller turns on or off a solenoid valve.Dehumidification may be accomplished by using the same compressor used for cooling thechamber. The dehumidify output from the controller may control a separate control valveconnected to a set of heat exchanger coils.
2704 Controller Controller Applications
Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 10-11
10.4. TO VIEW AND ADJUST HUMIDITY PARAMETERSDo This This Is The Display You
Should SeeAdditional Notes
This selects the pageheader which contains thehumidity parameters
7. Repeat this procedure for all Humidity parameters .
The full list of parameters available under this list header is shown in the following table
Read only display of DewPoint
4. Press or to scrollto the required parameter inthe list
5. Press to select theparameter
6. Press or to changethe value
3. Press to display theparameter list
1. From any display press as many times as necessaryto access the page headermenu
2. Press or to select‘HUMIDITY’
Controller Applications 2704 Controller
10-12 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00
10.4.1. Humidity Parameters
Table Number:
10.4.1.
These parameters allow you to view or adjustthe parameters for humidity control
HUMIDITY
(Options)
Parameter Name Parameter Description Value Default AccessLevel
Dew Point Wet/Dry temperaturemeasurement of dew point
-999.9 to999.9
L1
R/O
Rel Humidity Relative Humidity 0.0 to 100.0 L1
R/O
Resolution Display resolution XXXXX
XXXX.X
XXX.XX
XX.XXX
X.XXXX
L3
Atm Pressure Atmospheric Pressure 0.0 to 2000.0 1013
mbar
L3
PMetric Const Psychometric Constant 0.0 to 10.0 6.66 L3
Wet Bulb Offs Wet bulb temperaturecorrection
-100.0 to100.0
0.0 L3
Humidity SBrk Sensor break action forhumidity control
No
Yes
L1
Dry Bulb Temp Dry Bulb Temperature Range units L1 R/O
Wet Bulb Temp Wet Bulb Temperature Range units L1 R/O
2704 Controller Input Operators
Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 11-1
11. CHAPTER 11 INPUT OPERATORS................................. 211.1. WHAT ARE INPUT OPERATORS.........................................................211.2. CUSTOM LINEARISATION...................................................................311.2.1. Example: To Linearise Input 1.................................................................411.2.2. Input Operator Custom Linearisation Parameters .....................................611.2.3. Compensation for Sensor Non-Linearities ................................................711.3. THERMOCOUPLE/PYROMETER SWITCHING ...............................811.3.1. To Set Up Thermocouple/Pyrometer Switching Points.............................911.3.2. Input Operators Switch Over Parameters ................................................1011.4. TO SET UP INPUT OPERATORS (MONITOR) ................................1111.4.1. Input Operator Monitor Parameters ........................................................1111.5. BCD INPUT..............................................................................................1211.5.1. Main Features..........................................................................................12
Input Operators 2704 Controller
11-2 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00
11. Chapter 11 Input Operators
11.1. WHAT ARE INPUT OPERATORS
The 2704 controller can have three control loops. Each loop can be independentlyconfigured to the process to be controlled. This has been described in Chapters 9 and 10 forPID, Cascade, Ratio, Override, Humidity Control, etc. It is also possible to apply customlinearisation to the inputs of each loop. This is a 16 point straight line linearisation and theparameters can be made available at Levels 1, 2 and 3 so that scaling can be carried outduring commissioning.Custom linearisation is achieved under three page headers in the controller.
Also included in this section are parameters which allow you to switch inputs betweendifferent thermocouple types or between a thermocouple and pyrometer when the process is ahigh temperature furnace.
The page headers are:
INPUT OPERS (Cust Lin 1Page)
These parameters set up the custom linearisation forinput 1
INPUT OPERS (Cust Lin 2Page)
These parameters set up the custom linearisation forinput 2
INPUT OPERS (Cust Lin 3Page)
These parameters set up the custom linearisation forinput 3
INPUT OPERS (Switch 1Page)
These parameters provide switch over betweenthermocouple types or pyrometer
INPUT OPERS (Monitor 1Page)
Logs maximum and minimum, counts time abovethreshold
BCD INPUT To select a numerical value from an external BCDswitch
The Input Operators page is only available if Input Operators has been enabled inconfiguration level. This is described in the Engineering Handbook, Part No. HA026933.
Note:In addition to linearising the controller inputs channels, it is equally valid to customise othersources such as Output Channels. This allows you, for example, to compensate for non linearcontrol valve characteristics.
2704 Controller Input Operators
Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 11-3
11.2. CUSTOM LINEARISATION
The linearisation uses a 16 point straight line fit.Figure 11.1 shows an example of a curve to be linearised and is used to illustrate theterminology used for the parameters found in the INPUT OPERS (Cust Lin1 Page).
Figure 11-1: Linearisation Example
Notes:
1. The linearisation block works on rising inputs/rising outputs or rising inputs/fallingoutputs. It is not suitable for outputs which rise and fall on the same curve.
2. Input Lo/Output Lo and Input Hi/Output Hi are entered first to define the low and highpoints of the curve. It is not necessary to define all 15 intermediate points if the accuracyis not required. Points not defined will be ignored and a straight line fit will applybetween the last point defined and the Input Hi/Output Hi point.
Output Hi
Output Lo
Output 2( to 15)
Input HiInput Lo Input 2( to 15)
Ignored datapoints
Terminatedsearch
Input Operators 2704 Controller
11-4 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00
11.2.1. Example: To Linearise Input 1
Do This This Is The Display YouShould See
Additional Notes
To select the Input (orOutput) to linearise
7. Press to selectInput Value
Displays the Current inputvalue. Access level 1
8. Press to selectOutput Value
Displays the Current Outputvalue. Access level 1
This enables customlinearisation
3. Press to show Sub-headers
4. Press to show theparameter list
5. Press to select ‘Enable’
6. Press or to ‘On’
1. From any display press as many times as necessaryto access the page headermenu
2. Press or to select‘INPUT OPERS’
INPUT OPERS is onlyshown if it has beenenabled in configurationlevel.
2704 Controller Input Operators
Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 11-5
14. Repeat the above two steps to set the high points then continue for as many intermediatepoints as required
10. Press to select InputLo
11. Press or to set theminimum input value
12. Press to select OutputLo
13. Press or to set theoutput value whichcorresponds to the Input Lovalue
This is the value read by thesensor. Access level 3
This is the displayed value
The following table gives the full list ofparameters available in this list
9. Press to selectOutput Status
Good The input isgood and inrange
Bad If the input isbad or out ofrange the outputvalue is bad
Input Operators 2704 Controller
11-6 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00
11.2.2. Input Operator Custom Linearisation Parameters
Table Number:
11.2.2.
This page allows you to set up a customisedlinearisation curve
INPUT OPERS(Cust Lin 1)
Parameter Name Parameter Description Value Default AccessLevel
Enable To enable customlinearisation
OffOn
Off L3
Input Value The current value of theinput
Range R/O
Output Value The current value of theoutput
Range R/O
Output Status The conditions are OK
The conditions are bad orout of range
Good
Bad
R/O
Input Lo Adjust to the low input value Range L3
Output Lo Adjust to correspond to thelow input value
Range L3
Input Hi Adjust to the high inputvalue
Range L3
Output Hi Adjust to correspond to thehigh input value
Range L3
Input 2 Adjust to the first break point Range L1
Output 2 Adjust to correspond to input2
Range L1
The above two parameters are repeated for all intermediate break points, ie 2 to 14
Input 15 Adjust to the last break point Range L1
Output 15 Adjust to correspond to input15
Range L1
The above table is repeated for:• INPUT OPERS (Cust Lin 2 Page)• INPUT OPERS (Cust Lin 3 Page)
2704 Controller Input Operators
Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 11-7
Output Hieg 1000oC
Output Loeg 0oC
Output 2( to 15)
Input Hieg 1000oC
Input Loeg 0oC
Input 2( to 15)
Cal Point 6
Cal Point 5
Cal Point 4Cal Point 3
Cal Point 2
Cal Point 1
11.2.3. Compensation for Sensor Non-LinearitiesThe custom linearisation feature can also be used to compensate for errors in the sensor ormeasurement system. The intermediate points are, therefore, available in Level 1 so thatknown discontinuities in the curve can be calibrated out. Figure 11.2 shows an example ofthe type of discontinuity which can occur in the linearisation of a temperature sensor.
Figure 11-2: Compensation for Sensor Discontinuities
The calibration of the sensor uses the same procedure as described above. Adjust the output(displayed) value against the corresponding input value to compensate for any errors in thestandard linearisation of the sensor.
Input Operators 2704 Controller
11-8 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00
11.3. THERMOCOUPLE/PYROMETER SWITCHING
This facility is commonly used in wide range temperature applications where it is necessaryto control accurately over the range. A thermocouple may be used to control at lowertemperatures and a pyrometer then controls at very high temperatures. Alternatively twothermocouples of different types may be used.
Figure 11-3 shows a process heating over time with boundaries which define the switchingpoints between the two devices. The higher boundary (2 to 3) is normally set towards the topend of the thermocouple range and the lower boundary (1 to 2) set towards the lower end ofthe pyrometer (or second thermocouple) range. The controller calculates a smooth transitionbetween the two devices.
Figure 11-3: Thermocouple to Pyrometer Switching
Input 2High temperaturethermocouple orpyrometer
Input 1Low temperaturethermocouple
2704Temperature
controller
Boundary 2/3
Boundary 1/2
S
Temperature
Time T
S
Controller operates entirelyon the higher temperaturedevice
Controller operates entirelyon the lower temperaturedevice
U
RController operates on acombination of both devices
2704 Controller Input Operators
Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 11-9
11.3.1. To Set Up Thermocouple/Pyrometer Switching Points
Do This This Is The Display YouShould See
Additional Notes
5. Press to show theparameter list
6. Press again to select‘Switch Lo’
7. Press or tochange the value
The Process Value usedby the controller is derivedfrom Input 1when it isbelow the value set on thedisplay
8. Press to selectSwitch Hi
9. Press or tochange the value
The Process Value usedby the controller is derivedfrom Input 2 when it isabove the value set on thedisplay.
The transition betweenInput 1 and Input 2 isdetermined by the SwitchOver algorithm
The following table gives the full list of parameters available under this list header
3. Press to show Sub-headers
4. Press or toscroll to ‘Switch 1’
1. From any display press as many times as necessaryto access the page headermenu
2. Press or to select‘INPUT OPERS’
Input Operators 2704 Controller
11-10 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00
11.3.2. Input Operators Switch Over Parameters
Table Number:
11.3.2.
This page allows you to set up and inspectSwitch Over parameters
INPUT OPERS
(Switch 1 Page)
Parameter Name Parameter Description Value Default AccessLevel
Switch Lo PV = Input 1 below thisvalue
Can be adjusted up to thelimit set by ‘Input Lo’ inconfiguration level or thelimit set by ‘Switch Hi’
Display Range L3
Switch Hi PV = Input 2 above thisvalue
Can be adjusted up to thelimit set by ‘Input Hi’ inconfiguration level or thelimit set by ‘Switch Lo’
Display Range L3
Output Value The current working value Display Range R/O
Output Status The conditions are OK
The conditions are bad orout of range
Good
Bad
R/O
Input 1 Value The current working value
Can be adjusted betweenthe limits set by ‘Input Lo’and ‘Input Hi’ inconfiguration level
Display Range R/O
Input 1 Status The conditions are correct
The conditions are bad orout of range
Good
Bad
R/O
Input 2 Value The current working value
Can be adjusted betweenthe limits set by ‘Input Lo’and ‘Input Hi’ inconfiguration level
Display Range R/O
Input 2 Status The conditions are correct
The conditions are bad orout of range
Good
Bad
R/O
2704 Controller Input Operators
Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 11-11
11.4. TO SET UP INPUT OPERATORS (MONITOR)
The Monitor block:
1. Logs the Maximum and Minimum excursions of the PV. These values are reset when:-a) An external logic input, configured as reset, is enabledb) The reset parameter, see Table 11.4.1, is changed to Yes
2. Counts the time above a threshold3. Provides a time alarm
11.4.1. Input Operator Monitor Parameters
Table Number:
11.4.1.
This page allows you to set up Monitorparameters. The values will only berecorded if the function has been enabled inconfiguration level.
INPUT OPERS(Monitor 1 Page)
Parameter Name Parameter Description Value Default AccessLevel
Input Input value Range L1
Reset Reset No = to run
Yes = to reset
No L3
Maximum The maximum valuerecorded by the controllerbetween resets, see 1.above
Range R/O
Minimum The minimum valuerecorded by the controllerbetween resets, see 1.above
Range R/O
Trigger PV threshold for the timerlog
Range L3
Day Days above threshold 0 to 32767 R/O
Time Time above threshold 0:00:00.0 R/O
Day Alarm This sets the alarmthreshold for the number ofdays that the alarm is active
0 to 32767 L3
Time Alarm This sets the alarmthreshold for the time thatthe alarm is active
0:00:00.0 L3
Alarm Output Displays an alarm when thenumber of days and timehas been exceeded
Off
On
R/O
The above parameters are viewed and altered using the same procedure as Section 11.3.1.
Input Operators 2704 Controller
11-12 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00
11.5. BCD INPUT
An available option with the 2704 is the Binary Coded Decimal (BCD) function block. Thisfeature is normally used to select a program number by using panel mounted BCD decadeswitches.
11.5.1. Main FeaturesCalculation of BCD Value: The function calculates a BCD value dependant upon the stateof the inputs. Unconnected inputs are detected as off. This value is available as a wireableparameter.
Calculation of BCD Value: The function calculates a decimal value dependant upon thestate of the inputs. Unconnected inputs are detected as off. This value is available as awireable parameter.
Digit 1 Output: The function calculates the first decade BCD value dependant on the stateof inputs 1 to 4. Unconnected inputs are detected as off. This value is available as a wireableparameter.
Digit 2 Output: The function calculates the second decade BCD value dependant on thestate of inputs 5 to 8. Unconnected inputs are detected as off. This value is available as awireable parameter.
2nd Decade 1st Decade BCD Decimal 2nd Digit 1st Digit0011 1001 39 57 3 90010 0110 26 38 2 6
Table Number:
11.5.
This page allows you to view the BCD inputvalues
INPUT OPERS
(BCD Input Page)
Parameter Name Parameter Description Value Default AccessLevel
BCD Value Reads the value (in decimal)of the switch as it appearson the digital inputs
0-99 R/O
Decimal Value Reads the value of theswitch as it appears on thedigital inputs
0-255 R/O
Digit 1(Units) Units value of the first switch 0-9 R/O
Digit 2(Tens) Tens value of the secondswitch
0-9 R/O
2704 Controller Totaliser, Timer. Clock, Counter Operation
Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 12-1
12. CHAPTER 12 TOTALISER, TIMER, CLOCK, COUNTEROPERATION............................................................................. 2
12.1. WHAT ARE TIMER BLOCKS?..............................................................212.2. TIMER TYPES ..........................................................................................412.2.1. On Pulse Timer Mode...............................................................................412.2.2. Off Delay Timer Mode..............................................................................512.2.3. One Shot Timer Mode...............................................................................612.2.4. Minimum On Timer Mode........................................................................712.3. TIMER BLOCKS ......................................................................................812.3.1. Timer Parameters ......................................................................................812.4. THE CLOCK .............................................................................................912.5. TIME BASED ALARMS ........................................................................1012.5.1. Timer Alarm Parameters .........................................................................1112.6. TOTALISERS ..........................................................................................1212.6.1. Totaliser Parameters................................................................................13
Totaliser, Timer. Clock, Counter Operation 2704 Controller
12-2 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00
12. Chapter 12 Totaliser, Timer, Clock, CounterOperation
12.1. WHAT ARE TIMER BLOCKS?
Timer Blocks allow the controller to use time/date information as part of the control process.They can be triggered by an event and used to initiate an action. For example, a programmercan be set to RUN at a particular day and time or an action delayed as a result of a digitalinput signal. The Timer Blocks page is only available if Timer Blocks has been enabled inconfiguration level. This is described in the Engineering Handbook, Part No. HA026933.
The Timer Blocks fitted in the 2704 controller are:
Four timer blocks Timer blocks can have four modes of operation which areexplained in Section 12.2. The timer type will have been set inConfiguration level. The timer will be activated by an event. Theevent will also have been defined in Configuration mode or itmay be triggered by a parameter in the list. Timing continues fora set time period. This output can be ‘wired’ in configurationmode to operate an event.Configuration of Timer function blocks is described inEngineering Handbook HA026933
Clock This is a real time clock which can be used to operate other timebased functions.
Two alarm (clock)blocks
Alarms can be switched on or off at a particular day or time andprovide a digital output. This output can be wired inconfiguration mode to operate an event.Configuration of Timer Alarm function blocks is described inEngineering Handbook HA026933
Four totaliser blocks Totaliser blocks can also be ‘wired’, in Configuration level, toany parameter. They are used to provide a running total of aparameter and give an output when a pre-set total is reached. Anexample might be to totalise the flow through a pipe. The outputcan also be ‘wired’ in Configuration level to operate an eventsuch as a relay.Configuration of Totaliser function blocks is described inEngineering Handbook HA026933
2704 Controller Totaliser, Timer. Clock, Counter Operation
Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 12-3
Timer Blocks are grouped under page headers as follows:
Timer 1 Page Parameters to set the time period and readelapsed time for timer 1
Timer 2 Page Parameters to set the time period and readelapsed time for timer 2
Timer 3 Page Parameters to set the time period and readelapsed time for timer 3
Timer 4 Page Parameters to set the time period and readelapsed time for timer 4
Clock Page To read set time
Alarm 1 Page Parameters to set a time and day alarm andread the alarm output condition for alarm 1
Alarm 2 Page Parameters to set a time and day alarm andread the alarm output condition for alarm 2
Totaliser1 Page Parameters to read the totalised value, setand monitor an alarm on totalised value.
Totaliser2 Page Parameters to read the totalised value, setand monitor an alarm on totalised value.
Totaliser3 Page Parameters to read the totalised value, setand monitor an alarm on totalised value.
Totaliser4 Page Parameters to read the totalised value, setand monitor an alarm on totalised value.
TIMER BLOCKS
Totaliser, Timer. Clock, Counter Operation 2704 Controller
12-4 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00
12.2. TIMER TYPES
Each timer block can be configured to operate in four different modes. These modes areexplained below
12.2.1. On Pulse Timer ModeThis timer is used to generate a fixed length pulse from an edge trigger.
• The output is set to On when the input changes from Off to On.
• The output remains On until the time has elapsed
• If the ‘Trigger’ input parameter recurs while the Output is On, the Elapsed Time will resetto zero and the Output will remain On
• The triggered variable will follow the state of the output
Figure 12.1 illustrates the behaviour of the timer under different input conditions.
Figure 12-1: On Pulse Timer Under Different Input Conditions
Input
Output
Elapsed Time
Triggered
Time Time
Input
Output
Elapsed Time
Triggered
Time
Input Interval >Ti
2704 Controller Totaliser, Timer. Clock, Counter Operation
Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 12-5
12.2.2. Off Delay Timer ModeThis timer provides a delay between the trigger event and the Timer output. If a short pulsetriggers the Timer, then a pulse of one sample time (110mS) will be generated after the delaytime.
• The Output is set to Off when the Input changes from Off to On.
• The Output remains Off until the Time has elapsed.
• If the Input returns to Off before the time has elapsed, the Timer will continue until theElapsed Time equals the Time. It will then generate a pulse of one Sample Timeduration.
• Once the Time has elapsed, the Output will be set to On.
• The Output will remain On until the Input is cleared to Off.
• The Triggered variable will be set to On by the Input changing from Off to On. It willremain On until both the Time has elapsed and the Output has reset to Off.
Figure 12.2 illustrates the behaviour of the timer under different input conditions.
Figure 12-2: Off Delay Timer Under Different Input Conditions
Input
Output
Elapsed Time
Triggered
Time Time
110mS
Totaliser, Timer. Clock, Counter Operation 2704 Controller
12-6 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00
12.2.3. One Shot Timer ModeThis timer behaves like a simple oven timer.• When the Time is edited to a non-zero value the Output is set to On
• The Time value is decremented until it reaches zero. The Output is then cleared to Off
• The Time value can be edited at any point to increase or decrease the duration of the Ontime
• Once set to zero, the Time is not reset to a previous value, it must be edited by theoperator to start the next On-Time
• The Input is used to gate the Output. If the Input is set, the time will count down to zero.If the Input is cleared to Off, then the Time will hold and the Output will switch Off untilthe Input is next set.
Note: since the Input is a digital wire, it is possible for the operator to NOT wire it, andset the Input value to On which permanently enables the timer.
• The Triggered variable will be set to On as soon as the Time is edited. It will reset whenthe Output is cleared to Off.
Figure 12.3 illustrates the behaviour of the timer under different input conditions.
Figure 12-3: One Shot Timer
Input
Output
Elapsed Time
Triggered
Time
Time Edited
Time
Time
Time Edited
Input
OutputA DCB
Time Edited A+B+C+D =
This diagram shows how the Input can be used to gate the Timer as a type of hold
2704 Controller Totaliser, Timer. Clock, Counter Operation
Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 12-7
12.2.4. Minimum On Timer ModeThis timer has been targeted at guaranteeing that the output remains On for a duration afterthe input signal has been removed. It may be used, for example, to ensure that a compressoris not cycled excessively.
• The output will be set to On when the Input changes from Off to On.
• When the Input changes from On to Off, the elapsed time will start incrementing towardsthe set Time.
• The Output will remain On until the elapsed time has reached the set Time. The Outputwill then switch Off.
• If the Input signal returns to On while the Output is On, the elapsed time will reset to 0,ready to begin incrementing when the Input switches Off.
• The Triggered variable will be set while the elapsed time is >0. It will indicate that thetimer is counting.
Figure 12.4 illustrates the behaviour of the timer under different input conditions.
Figure 12-4: Minimum On Timer Under Different Input Conditions
Input
Output
Elapsed Time
Triggered
TimeTime
Totaliser, Timer. Clock, Counter Operation 2704 Controller
12-8 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00
12.3. TIMER BLOCKS
To set the time on one of the four timer blocks:-
Do This This Is The Display YouShould See
Additional Notes
12.3.1. Timer Parameters
Table Number:
12.2.1.
This page allows you to set up TimerParameters
TIMER BLOCKS(Timer 1 to 4 Page)
Parameter Name Parameter Description Value Default
AccessLevel
Time Timer Time 0:00:00.0 L1
Input Trigger/Gate input. Turn Onto start timing
OffOn
Off L1
Triggered Timer triggered (timing) OffOn
R/O
Output Timer output. Occurs whenthe timer has timed out
Off
On
Off L1
Elapsed Time Timer elapsed time 0:00:00.0 R/O
Displays and allows thetime period to be set inTimer block 1
The following table givesthe full list of parametersavailable under this listheader
3. Press to show Sub-headers
4. Press or toselect ‘Timer 1 (to 4)’
5. Press to show theParameter List
6. Press again to select‘Time’
7. Press or to setthe time period
1. From any display press as many times as necessaryto access the page headermenu
2. Press or to select‘TIMER BLOCKS’
2704 Controller Totaliser, Timer. Clock, Counter Operation
Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 12-9
12.4. THE CLOCK
The clock is used as a reference for time based alarms. The time and day is set inconfiguration mode as described in the Engineering manual, Part Number HA026933. Inaccess levels 1 to 3 the time can be read as follows:-
Do This This Is The Display YouShould See
Additional Notes
Displays the set time
Displays the set day
5. Press to show theParameter List
1. From any display press as many times as necessaryto access the page headermenu
2. Press or to select‘TIMER BLOCKS’
3. Press to show Sub-headers
4. Press or toselect ‘Clock’
Totaliser, Timer. Clock, Counter Operation 2704 Controller
12-10 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00
12.5. TIME BASED ALARMS
There are two alarms available which allow an output to be turned on or off at a set time andday.
Do This This Is The Display YouShould See
Additional Notes
Selects the day to turn thealarm on. The choicesare:Never, Monday, Tuesday,Wednesday, Thursday,Friday, Saturday, Sunday,Mon-Fri, Mon-Sat, Sat-Sun Every Day
5. Press to select ‘OnDay’
6. Press or to setthe day to turn the alarmon.
Selects the time of day toturn the alarm on.
9. Repeat 3 to 6 above to set the day and time to turn the alarm off.
The following table gives the full list of parameters available under this listheader
1. From the TIMERBLOCKS page header,
press or toselect ‘Alarm 1 (or 2)’
2. Press to show theParameter List
3. Press again to select‘Enable’
4. Press or toEnable = ‘On’
This enables the use ofAlarm Timer Blocks.
It can be used, forexample, to disablealarms during factory shutdown periods.
7. Press to select ‘OnTime’
8. Press or to setthe alarm on time
2704 Controller Totaliser, Timer. Clock, Counter Operation
Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 12-11
12.5.1. Timer Alarm Parameters
Table Number:
12.4.1.
This page allows you to set up Timer AlarmParameters
TIMER BLOCKS(Alarm 1 or 2 Page)
Parameter Name Parameter Description Value Default
AccessLevel
Enable RTC Alarm 1 Enable
Enables the timer alarm
OffOn
Off L3
On-Day Sets the day to turn thealarm on
NeverMondayTuesdayWednesdayThursdayFridaySaturdaySundayMon-Fri,Mon-SatSat-SunEvery Day
Never L3
On-Time Sets the time of day to turnthe alarm on
0:00:00 to23:59:59
0:00:00
L3
Off-Day Sets the day to turn thealarm off
NeverMondayTuesdayWednesdayThursdayFridaySaturdaySundayMon-Fri,Mon-SatSat-SunEvery Day
Never L3
Off-Time Sets the time of day to turnthe alarm off
0:00:00 to23:59:59
0:00:00
L3
Output Alarm 1 output. Off
On
Off L1
Totaliser, Timer. Clock, Counter Operation 2704 Controller
12-12 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00
12.6. TOTALISERS
There are four totalisers.. It is usual to run a totaliser automatically from the source which isto be totalised. Separate Run and Reset parameters are, therefore, provided which can bewired in configuration mode to the necessary sources. The following example, however,shows how a totaliser can be run from the operator interface.
Do This This Is The Display YouShould See
Additional Notes
To Run a Totaliser
To Hold a Totaliser
The totaliser will begin to run.
Run Starts the totaliserReset Resets the totaliser
Note:When the totaliser is runningit can also be reset or runusing the Reset parameter.
Following a reset the totaliserwill be ready to run again fromzero.
6. Press to select‘Hold’
7. Press or tochange the value between‘Continue’ & ‘Hold’
Hold Stops thetotaliser
Continue
Allows thetotaliser torun from thepreviouslytotalisedvalue
1. From the TIMERBLOCKS page header,
press or toselect ‘Totaliser 1 (to 4)’
2. Press to show theParameter List
3. Press or toscroll to and highlight‘Run’
4. Press to select ‘Run
5. ’ Press or tochange the value to ‘Run’
8. Repeat 3 to 6 above to set the day and time to turn the alarm off.
The following table gives the full list of parameters available under this listheader
2704 Controller Totaliser, Timer. Clock, Counter Operation
Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 12-13
12.6.1. Totaliser Parameters
Table Number:
12.5.1.
This page allows you to set up TotaliserParameters
TIMER BLOCKS(Totaliser1 (to 4)
Page)
Parameter Name Parameter Description Value Default
AccessLevel
Reset Resets the totaliser NoYes
No L1
Run Runs the totaliser RunReset
Reset L1
Hold Holds the totaliser at itscurrent valueNote:The Run & Hold parametersare designed to be wired to(for example) digital inputs.Run must be ‘on’ and Holdmust be ‘off’ for the totaliserto operate.
HoldContinue
Hold L1
Total This shows the totalisedvalue
L1
Alarm Setpoint Sets the totalised value atwhich an alarm will occur
L3
Alarm Output This is a read only valuewhich indicates the alarmoutput On or Off.
The totalised value can be apositive number or anegative number.
If the number is positive thealarm occurs when
Total > + Alarm Setpoint
If the number is negative thealarm occurs when
Total > - Alarm Setpoint
OffOn
Off L1
Totaliser, Timer. Clock, Counter Operation 2704 Controller
12-14 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00
2704 Controller User Values
Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 13-1
13. CHAPTER 13 PATTERN GENERATOR, USER VALUESAND USER MESSAGES .......................................................... 2
13.1. WHAT IS THE PATTERN GENERATOR? ..........................................213.1.1. To Set Up The Pattern Generator..............................................................213.2. WHAT ARE USER VALUES?.................................................................413.2.1. To Adjust User Values..............................................................................413.3. WHAT ARE USER MESSAGES? ...........................................................513.3.1. To Inspect User Messages.........................................................................5
User Values 2704 Controller
13-2 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00
13. Chapter 13 Pattern Generator, User Valuesand User Messages
13.1. WHAT IS THE PATTERN GENERATOR?
The pattern generator allows groups of digital values to be selected from a single inputnumber. This number may be provided from the programmer, from BCD inputs or from auser defined source. An example of its application would be to allow fixed output patterns tobe applied to different segments in a programmer
The pattern generator consists of 16 patterns, and each pattern consists of up to 16 digitaloutputs. The pattern can be selected from the user interface as follows although it is muchmore likely to have been wired to another source such as a programmer user values.
13.1.1. To Set Up The Pattern Generator
Do This This Is The Display YouShould See
Additional Notes
1. From any display press as many times as necessaryto access the page headermenu
2. Press or to select‘PATTERN GENERATOR’
3. Press to show Sub-headers
4. Press or to select‘Dig Group 1 (or 2)’
2704 Controller User Values
Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 13-3
= Off
æ = OnIn this example thenumber of digits in eachpattern row has beenconfigured to six.
8. Press to select the firstpattern - ‘Pattern 0’
9. Press or tochange to change the firstdigit in the pattern to On orOff
10. Press to select the nextdigit in the pattern
11. Repeat the above threesteps to set all digits inPattern 0
12. Repeat steps 10 to 13 to set up all 16 patterns in Dig Group 1.
Note:-The parameter ‘Current OP’ shows the current state of the pattern generator as it is beingrun.
This is the number of thepattern to set up.
5. Press to show theparameter list
6. Press again to select‘Pattern’
7. Press or tochange the pattern
Current selected output
User Values 2704 Controller
13-4 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00
13.2. WHAT ARE USER VALUES?
User Values are normally used as constants in an analogue or digital operation.The 2704 controller contains up to 12 user values which are in a single list under the pageheader ‘User Values’. The User Values page is only available if Analogue and LogicOperators have been enabled in configuration level. This is described in the EngineeringHandbook Part No. HA026933.
13.2.1. To Adjust User Values
Do This This Is The Display YouShould See
Additional Notes
[Units] If units have been selected in configuration level they will be displayed here.The choices are:-oC/oF/oKV, mV, A, mAPHmmHg, psi, bar, mbar, mmWg, inWg, inWW, PSIGOhms%, %RH, %O2, %CO2, %CP,PPMCustom units are also possible
The value can be adjustedbetween high and lowlimits as set inconfiguration level.
1. From any display press as many times as necessaryto access the page headermenu
2. Press or to select‘USER VALUES’
3. Press to show Sub-headers
4. Press or toselect ‘User Val 1 (to12)’
3. Press to show theparameter list
4. Press or tochange the value
2704 Controller User Values
Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 13-5
13.3. WHAT ARE USER MESSAGES?
A User Message takes the form of a pop window as shown below:-
This is a similar format to that which occurs, for example, when an alarm occurs. See alsoSection 7.5. This message, however, can be displayed when a particular event - defined bythe user - occurs. For example, a User Message can be displayed if it has been wired to adigital input to alert an operator to a particular event.User messages can only se set up in configuration level. They can, however, be inspected inLevel 1.
13.3.1. To Inspect User Messages
Do This This Is The Display YouShould See
Additional Notes
Press ª+° to Ack
Usr 1
Usr 2
User defined TitleUser defined Text
Instruction
The Title is ‘Usr 1’ whichmay have beencustomised inconfiguration level to showa meaningful message.
Similarly, the Text is ‘Usr2’ which may also havebeen customised.
The parameters ‘ShowMsg’ and ‘Dismissed’ areintended to be read overdigital communications.
1. From any display press as many times as necessaryto access the page headermenu
2. Press or to select‘USER MESSAGES’
3. Press to show Sub-headers
4. Press or toselect ‘Msg 1 (to 8)’
3. Press to show theparameter list
4. Press or tohighlight each parameterin turn
User Values 2704 Controller
13-6 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00
2704 Controller Analogue Operators
Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 14-1
14. CHAPTER 14 ANALOGUE OPERATORS ....................... 214.1. WHAT ARE ANALOGUE OPERATORS?............................................214.1.1. Analogue Operations.................................................................................314.2. TO VIEW AND ADJUST ANALOGUE OPERATOR PARAMETERS4
Analogue Operators 2704 Controller
14-2 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00
14. Chapter 14 Analogue Operators
14.1. WHAT ARE ANALOGUE OPERATORS?
Analogue Operators allow the controller to perform mathematical operations on two inputvalues. These values can be sourced from any available parameter including AnalogueValues, User Values and Digital Values. Each input value can be scaled using a multiplyingfactor or scalar as shown in Figure 14.1.
The parameters to use, the type of calculation to be performed and the acceptable limits of thecalculation are determined in Configuration level (see 2704 Engineering HandbookHA026933). In access level 3 you can change values of each of the scalars. In Access levels2 & 3, provided the Analogue Operators page has been promoted, the input values and theresult of the calculation can be read.
The Analogue Operators page is only available if Analogue and Logic Operators have beenenabled in configuration level. This is described in the 2704 Engineering Handbook.
Up to 24 separate operations can be performed and a separate page header is provided foreach one.
Figure 14-1: Analogue Operators
Output Value(result of calculation)
Analogue input 1
Analogue input 2
Analogue operatorSee 14.1.1.Input 1 Scalar
Input 2 Scalar
2704 Controller Analogue Operators
Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 14-3
14.1.1. Analogue OperationsThe following operations can be performed:
Off The selected analogue operator is turned off
Add The output result is the addition of Input 1 and Input 2
Subtract The output result is the difference Input 1 and Input 2where Input 1 > Input 2
Multiply The output result is the multiplication of Input 1 and Input 2
Divide The output result is Input 1 divided by Input 2
Absolute Difference The output result is the absolute difference between Input 1 and Input2
Select Max The output result is the maximum of Input 1 and Input 2
Select Min The output result is the minimum of Input 1 and Input 2
Hot Swap Input 1 appears at the output provided input 1 is ‘good’. If input 1 is‘bad’ then input 2 value will appear at the output. An example of abad input occurs during a sensor break condition.
Sample and Hold Normally input 1 will be an analogue value and input B will be digital.
The output tracks input 1 when input 2 = 1 (Sample).
The output will remain at the current value when input 2 = 0 (Hold).
Input 2 can be an analogue value and must change from 0 to 100%to provide a sample and hold at the output.
Power The output is the value at input 1 raised to the power of the value atinput 2. I.e. input 1input 2
Square Root The output result is the square root of Input 1. Input 2 has no effect.
Log The output result is the logarithm (base 10) of Input 1. Input 2 has noeffect
Ln The output result is the logarithm (base n) of Input 1. Input 2 has noeffect
Exp The output result is the exponential of Input 1. Input 2 has no effect
10x The output result is 10 raised to the power of Input 1 value. I.e.10input 1. Input 2 has no effect
Select Logic 1 Input 1 or input 2 is switched to the output depending upon the stateof
up to the logic input.
If logic input is true input 1 is switched through to the output.
Select Logic 32 If logic input is false input 2 is switched through to the output.
Analogue Operators 2704 Controller
14-4 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00
14.2. TO VIEW AND ADJUST ANALOGUE OPERATORPARAMETERS
Do This This Is The Display YouShould See
Additional Notes
6. Press to highlight‘Input 1 Scalar’
7. Press again to select‘Input 1 Scalar’
8. Press or tochange the value
This scalar is used as amultiplying factor on input 1
This is a read only parameteravailable in Access Level 1(provided the page has beenpromoted to this level). Itdisplays the type ofcalculation which has beenconfigured.
The choices are:Off, Add, Subtract, Multiply,Divide, Absolute Difference,Select Max, Select Min, HotSwap, Sample Hold, SquareRoot, Log, Ln, Exp, 10x,Select Logic 1 to Select Logic32.
1. From any display press as many times as necessaryto access the page headermenu
2. Press or to select‘ANALOGUE OPERS’
3. Press to show Sub-headers
4. Press or toselect ‘An 1 (to 24)’
5. Press to show theparameter list
2704 Controller Analogue Operators
Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 14-5
11. Press to selectInput 1 Value
12. Press to selectInput 2 Value
13. Press to selectOutput Value
This is a read only value ofinput 1
This is a read only value ofthe result of thecalculation.
This is a read only value ofinput 2
[Units] If units have beenselected in configuration levelthey will be displayed here.
14. Press to selectStatus
The result of thecalculation is Good or Bad.
Eg. It is within high andlow limits set inconfiguration level.
9. Press to selectInput 2 Scalar
This scalar is used as amultiplying factor on input 2
10. Press or tochange the value
Analogue Operators 2704 Controller
14-6 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00
2704 Controller Logic Operators
Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 15-1
15. CHAPTER 15 LOGIC OPERATORS ................................ 215.1.1. Logic Operations.......................................................................................215.2. TO VIEW LOGIC OPERATOR PARAMETERS .................................3
Logic Operators 2704 Controller
15-2 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00
15. Chapter 15 Logic OperatorsLogic Operators allow the controller to perform logical calculations on two input values.These values can be sourced from any available parameter including Analogue Values, UserValues and Digital Values.The parameters to use, the type of calculation to be performed, input value inversion and‘fallback’ value are determined in Configuration level (see Engineering HandbookHA026933). In levels 1 to 3 you can view the values of each input and read the result of thecalculation.The Logic Operators page is only available if Analogue and Logic Operators have beenenabled in configuration level. This is described in the Engineering Handbook.
Up to 32 separate calculations can be performed and a separate page header is provided foreach one.
15.1.1. Logic Operations
The following calculations can be performed:
Off The selected logic operator is turned off
AND The output result is ON when both Input 1 and Input 2 are ON
OR The output result is ON when either Input 1 or Input 2 is ON
XOR Exclusive OR. The output result is true when one and only oneinput is ON. If both inputs are ON the output is OFF.
Latch The output is ON when input 1 turns ON. The output remains ONwhen input 1 turns OFF. The output is reset to OFF by turninginput 2 ON.
Equal The output result is ON when Input 1 = Input 2
Greater The output result is ON when Input 1 > Input 2
Less than The output result is ON when Input 1 < Input 2
Greater or Equal The output result is ON when Input 1 > Input 2
Less or Equal The output result is ON when Input 1 < Input 2
Figure 15-1: Logic Operators
Logic input 1
Logic input 2
Output Value(result of calculation)
Logic operatorSee 15.1.1.
Invert option
Invert option
2704 Controller Logic Operators
Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 15-3
15.2. TO VIEW LOGIC OPERATOR PARAMETERSDo This This Is The Display You
Should SeeAdditional Notes
This is a read only valueavailable in Access level 1(provided the page hasbeen promoted to thislevel).It displays the type ofcalculation which has beenconfigured.
The choices are:Off, AND, OR, XOR, Latch,Equal, Not Equal, Greater,Less Than, Great or Equal,Less or Equal.
This is a read only value,Off or On.
1. From any display press as many times as necessaryto access the page headermenu
2. Press or to select‘LOGIC OPERS’
3. Press to show Sub-headers
4. Press or toselect ‘Logic 1 (to 32)’
5. Press to show theparameter list
6. Press to show ‘Input1 Value’
Logic Operators 2704 Controller
15-4 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00
8. Press to selectOutput Value
This is a read only valueof the result of thecalculation,Off or On.
9. Press to selectStatus
The result of thecalculation is Good orBad.
An example of a badstatus may occur if asensor break condition isdetected.
The output will default to a‘fallback’ value previouslyset in configuration level.
This is described in theEngineering Handbook,Part No. HA026933.
7. Press to select Input2 Value
This is a read only value,Off or On.
2704 Controller Digital Communications
Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 16-1
16. CHAPTER 16 DIGITAL COMMUNICATIONS .................. 216.1. WHAT IS DIGITAL COMMUNICATIONS? ........................................216.2. TO SET COMMUNICATIONS ADDRESS AND RESOLUTION.......316.3. COMMUNICATIONS DIAGNOSTICS..................................................4
Digital Communications 2704 Controller
16-2 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00
16. Chapter 16 Digital Communications
16.1. WHAT IS DIGITAL COMMUNICATIONS?
Digital Communications (or ‘comms’ for short) allows the controller to communicate with aPC or a networked computer system. A choice of comms protocol is available and can beselected in configuration level. These are MODBUS (or JBUS), EIBisynch, and Profibus.
Comms modules can be fitted which use RS232, RS485 or RS422 Transmission Standards.A full description of these standards is given in the 2000 series Communications Handbook,part number HA026230.
Comms modules can be fitted into either or both of two positions referred to as the H slot andthe J slot which correspond to the rear terminal connections, see also section 2.4. Both slotpositions may be used at the same time. An example is, to allow a multi-drop connectionbetween a number of controllers and a computer running, say, a SCADA package on onecomms position, and a separate PC used for configuration purposes on the second commsposition. In this example an RS485 module may be fitted for the multi-drop/SCADArequirement and RS232 in the second position for the single PC/configuration requirement.
Note: When the controller is placed into Configuration Level it is taken ‘off line’ andplaced into a standby state. In this state it no longer monitors or controls the plant.
2704 Controller Digital Communications
Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 16-3
16.2. TO SET COMMUNICATIONS ADDRESS AND RESOLUTION
Parameters in the Comms page allow you to set up the Address and Resolution.The operation of the H and J Modules is the same.
Do This This Is The Display YouShould See
Additional Notes
5. Press to show the listof comms parameters.
6. Press again to select‘Address’
7. Press or tochange the instrumentaddress
8. Press to selectfurther parameters
9. Press or tochange a parameter valuewhere applicable
Up to 254 addresses canbe set in level 1
Digital communicationsmodules may be fitted ineither one or bothpositions.
ModbusEIBisynchORProfibusEI Bisynch(f ordered)
Level 3Readonly
1. From any display press as many times as necessaryto access the page headermenu
2. Press or to select‘COMMS’
3. Press to show Sub-headers
4. Press or toselect ‘H Module’
Choices are:-
FullInteger
Level 3
Digital Communications 2704 Controller
16-4 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00
16.3. COMMUNICATIONS DIAGNOSTICS
Digital communications diagnostics is available under the Comms page header. Twoparameters are displayed. These show the number of times that the particular comms modulehas received a message. They are displayed as follows:
Do This This Is The Display YouShould See
Additional Notes
These are a read onlyparameters.
The H Rx and J Rxmessages incrementseach time a validmessage is received viathe H Comms Module or JComms modulerespectively.
The Timed Out messagesindicate a comms timeout
5. Press to show thediagnostic parameters
1. From any display press as many times as necessaryto access the page headermenu
2. Press or to select‘COMMS’
3. Press to show Sub-headers
4. Press or toselect ‘Diagnostic’
2704 Controller Standard IO
Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 17-1
17. CHAPTER 17 STANDARD IO .......................................... 217.1. WHAT IS STANDARD IO?......................................................................217.2. PV INPUT...................................................................................................317.2.1. To Scale the PV Input ...............................................................................317.2.2. Offset.........................................................................................................317.2.3. To View and Change Input Filter Time ....................................................517.2.4. Standard IO PV Input Parameters .............................................................617.3. ANALOGUE INPUT .................................................................................717.3.1. To Scale the Analogue Input.....................................................................717.3.2. Standard IO Analogue Input Parameters...................................................717.4. THE FIXED RELAY OUTPUT PARAMETERS...................................817.5. TO SCALE THE FIXED RELAY OUTPUT...........................................817.5.1. Standard IO AA Relay Parameters..........................................................1017.6. STANDARD DIGITAL IO PARAMETERS.........................................1117.6.1. Standard IO Digital Input/Output Parameters .........................................1117.7. STANDARD IO DIAGNOSTIC PAGE PARAMETERS.....................12
Standard IO 2704 Controller
17-2 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00
17. Chapter 17 Standard IO
17.1. WHAT IS STANDARD IO?
Standard IO refers to the fixed Input/Output connections as listed in Table 17-1 below.Parameters such as input/output limits, filter times and scaling of the IO can be adjusted inthe Standard IO pages.
This chapter also describes User Scaling of the standard IO.The controller is calibrated for life against known reference standards during manufacture,but user scaling allows you to offset the ‘permanent’ factory calibration to either:-
1. Scale the controller to your reference standards2. Match the calibration of the controller to an individual transducer or sensor3. To compensate for known offsets in process measurements
These offsets can be made to parameters in the Standard IO pages.
(PV InputPage)
Allows access to parameters which set up the fixedProcess Variable Input connected to terminals VH,VI, V+ and V-. This is, generally, the PV input for asingle loop controller.
(An InputPage)
Allows access to parameters which set up the fixedAnalogue Input connected to terminals BA, BB andBC. This is the high level input from a remotesource.
(AA RelayPage)
Allows access to parameters which set up the fixedRelay output connected to terminals AA, AB andAC. This relay may be used as an alarm relay. atime proportioning control output or valveraise/lower..
(Dig IO1Page)
to
(Dig IO7Page)
Allows access to parameters which set up the fixeddigital IO connected to terminals D1 to D7 and DC.
(DiagnosticPage)
Allows access to parameters which set up the fixeddigital Input connected to terminal D8 and DC.
Note:-Names shown in italics can be customised.
Table 17-1: Standard I/O
STANDARD IO
2704 Controller Standard IO
Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 17-3
17.2. PV INPUT
Allows access to parameters which set up the fixed Process Variable Input connected toterminals VH, VI, V+ and V-. This is the PV input for a single loop controller.
17.2.1. To Scale the PV InputScaling of the PV input applies to linear process inputs only, eg linearised transducers, whereit is necessary to match the displayed reading to the electrical input levels from thetransducer. PV input scaling is not provided for direct thermocouple or RTD inputs.Figure 17-1 shows an example of input scaling. where an electrical input of 4-20mA requiresthe display to read 2.5 to 200.0 units.
Figure 17-1: Input Scaling (Standard IO)
17.2.2. Offset
Offset has the effect of moving the whole curve, shown in Figure 17-1,up or down about acentral point. The ‘Offset’ parameter is found in the STANDARD IO (PV Input) page asshown in the controller view in Section 17.2.3.
Electrical Loeg 4 mA
Electrical Input
DisplayReading
Display Hieg 200.0
Display Loeg 2.5
Electrical Hieg 20 mA
Standard IO 2704 Controller
17-4 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00
To scale a linear PV Input proceed as follows:
Do This This Is The Display YouShould See
Additional Notes
Set this value to thelowest level of the input,eg 4mA.The units displayed heremay be mV, V, mA orOhms depending on what
[Units] If units have been selected in configuration levelthey will be displayed here.The choices are:-oC/oF/oKV, mV, A, mAPHmmHg, psi, bar, mbar, mmWg, inWg, inWW, PSIGOhms%, %RH, %O2, %CO2, %CP,PPMCustom units are also possible
The PV Input is connectedto terminals VH, V+, V-.
Set this value to thehighest level of the input ,eg 20mA.
1. From any display press as many times as necessaryto access the page headermenu
2. Press or to select‘STANDARD IO’
3. Press to show Sub-headers
4. Press or to select‘PV Input’ (if necessary)
5. Press to show‘Electrical Lo’
6. Press again to select‘Electrical Lo’
7. Press or to adjustthe value
8. Press to select‘Electrical Hi’
9. Press or to adjustthe value
2704 Controller Standard IO
Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 17-5
17.2.3. To View and Change Input Filter TimeAn input filter provides damping of the input signal. This may be necessary to prevent theeffects of excessively noise on the PV input.The filter may be turned off or set up to 10minsIf the input is configured to accept process levels, eg 4-20mA, as in the above example, theparameter which follows ‘Eng Value Hi’ is ‘Filter Time’.
For thermocouple and RTD inputs the first parameter to be displayed is the Input Filter Time,since the input scaling parameters do not appear for specific linearised inputs.
Do This This Is The Display YouShould See
Additional Notes
Set up the displayedvalue (instrumentminimum span) whichcorresponds to theElectrical Lo input, eg2.50
Set up the displayedvalue (instrumentmaximum span) whichcorresponds to theElectrical Hi input, eg200.00
10. Press to select ‘EngValue Lo’
11. Press or to adjustthe value
12. Press to select ‘EngValue Hi’
13. Press or to adjustthe value
The following table givesthe full list of parametersavailable under the PVInput list header
1. From the previous display
press to select ‘FilterTime’
2. Press or to adjustthe Filter Time between Offand 10mins
Standard IO 2704 Controller
17-6 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00
17.2.4. Standard IO PV Input Parameters
Table Number:
17.2.3.
This page allows you to set up PV InputParameters
STANDARD IO(PV Input
Page)
Parameter Name Parameter Description Value Default AccessLevel
Electrical Lo Electrical low input level Input range L3. Only
Electrical Hi Electrical high input level Input range for
Eng Value Lo Low display reading Display linear
Eng Value Hi High display reading range inputs
Filter Time PV input filter time. !Off to0:10:00.0
L3
Emissivity Emissivity. Only appears ifthe PV input is configured asa pyrometer
Off to 1.00 L3
Electrical Val The current electrical valueof the PV input
Input range R/O
PV Input Val
PV Input can be auser definedname.
The current value of the PVinput in engineering units.
Displayrange
R/O
Offset Transducer scaling offset.Only appears if the PV inputis configured for transducer
Displayrange
L3 R/O
CJC Temp CJC Temperature. Onlyappears if the PV input isconfigured for thermocouple
DisplayRange
R/O
PV In Status PV input status OKInitialisingCh A SbreakCh C SbreakCh A OutrangeCh C OutrangeCh A IP SatCh C IP SatCh A NotCalibCh C NotCalib
L3 R/O
SBrk Trip Imp Sensor break value Displayrange
L3 R/O
2704 Controller Standard IO
Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 17-7
17.3. ANALOGUE INPUT
Allows access to parameters which set up the fixed Analogue Input connected to terminalsBA, BB and BC. This is the high level input from a remote source.
17.3.1. To Scale the Analogue InputThe procedure is the same as that described in section 17.2.1.
17.3.2. Standard IO Analogue Input Parameters
Table Number:
17.3.2.
This page allows you to set up Analogue InputParameters
STANDARD IO(An Input
Page)
Parameter Name Parameter Description Value Default AccessLevel
Electrical Lo Electrical low input level Input range L3
Electrical Hi Electrical high input level Input range L3
Eng Value Lo Low display reading Displayrange
L3
Eng Value Hi High display reading Displayrange
L3
Filter Time Analogue input filter time !Off to0:10:00.0
L3
Electrical Value The current electrical valueof the analogue input
Input range R/O
An Input Val
An Input can be auser definedname.
The current value of the AnInput in engineering units
Displayrange
R/O
Offset Transducer scaling offset.Only appears if the PV inputis configured for transducer
Displayrange
L3 R/O
An In Status Analogue input status Good
Bad æ
L3 R/O
SBrk Trip Imp Sensor break value Displayrange
L3 R/O
Standard IO 2704 Controller
17-8 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00
17.4. THE FIXED RELAY OUTPUT PARAMETERS
Allows access to parameters which set up the fixed Relay output connected to terminals AA,AB and AC. This relay may be used as an alarm relay. or a time proportioning controloutput.
17.5. TO SCALE THE FIXED RELAY OUTPUT
If the relay is used as a time proportioning control output this means that the relay will, bydefault, be fully off for 0% power demand, fully on for 100% power demand and equal on/offtimes at 50% power demand.As with input scaling you can change these limits to suit the process. It is important to note,however, that these limits are set to safe values for the process. For example, for a heatingprocess it may be required to maintain a minimum level of temperature. This can be achievedby applying an offset at 0% power demand which will maintain the relay on for a period oftime. Care must be taken to ensure that this minimum on period does not cause the process tooverheatThese offsets can be made to parameters in the ‘AA Relay’ pages. The above example isshown in Fig 17-2
Table 17-2: Fixed Relay Scaling
Electrical Loeg Relay on for
short period
Electrical Output. Inthis example theon/off ratio of theoutput relay
PID Demandsignal
Eng Value Hieg 100%
Eng Value Loeg 0%
Electrical Hieg Relay
permanently on
2704 Controller Standard IO
Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 17-9
To set up and scale the Fixed Relay Output proceed as follows
Do This This Is The Display YouShould See
Additional Notes
If the relay is wired to thePID output demandsignal, as shown in Figure17-2,.set this to a lowvalue, normally 0.
The AA Relay isconnected to terminalsAA,AB and AC
If the relay is wired to thePID output demandsignal, as shown in Figure17-2,.set this to a highvalue, normally 100.
This parameter applies totime proportioning outputsonly.
Auto = 0.05sec
8. Press to select‘Electrical Lo’
9. Press or to adjustthe value
1. From any display press as many times as necessaryto access the page headermenu
2. Press or to select‘STANDARD IO’
3. Press to show Sub-headers
4. Press or to scrollto the AA Relay Page
5. Press to show the AARelay parameter list
6. Press again to select‘Min Pulse Time’
7. Press or to choose‘Auto’ or a minimum on/offtime for the relay
10. Press to select‘Electrical Hi’
11. Press or to adjustthe value
Standard IO 2704 Controller
17-10 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00
17.5.1. Standard IO AA Relay Parameters
Table Number:
17.5.1
This page allows you to set up the Fixed RelayParameters
STANDARD IO(AA Relay)
Parameter Name Parameter Description Value Default AccessLevel
The first five parameters only appear if the relay is configured for time proportion output
Min Pulse Time Minimum relay on or off time Auto = 0.05sor0.1 to 999.9
20sec L3
Electrical Lo Electrical low input level Input range L3
Electrical Hi Electrical high input level Input range L3
Eng Value Lo Low display reading Displayrange
L3
Eng Value Hi High display reading Displayrange
L3
AA Relay Value Status of the relay output -100 to 100 R/O.
(editableif notwired)
Set up this value so thatthe relay switches fully offcorresponding to theElectrical Low setting
Set up this value so thatthe relay switches fully oncorresponding to theElectrical High setting
The following table givesthe full list of parametersavailable under this listheader
12. Press to select ‘EngValue Lo’
13. Press or to adjustthe value
14. Press to select ‘EngValue Hi’
15. Press or to adjustthe value
2704 Controller Standard IO
Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 17-11
17.6. STANDARD DIGITAL IO PARAMETERS
This page allows access to parameters which set up the fixed digital IO connected toterminals D1 to D7 and DC.The standard digital IO1 to 7 can either be input or output as set up in configuration level, seeEngineering handbook HA026933. The choices are:-
1. Digital Input IO configured as a digital input2. On/Off IO configured as a digital output3. Time Proportion IO configured as a control output4. Valve Lower IO configured to raise the output of a motor valve controller5. Valve Raise IO configured to lower the output of a motor valve controller
The parameters are accessed in the same way as the sections above. When the logic outputsare configured as time proportioning outputs, they can be scaled using the same procedure asthe fixed relay output, described in 17.5..
The logic IO parameters are listed in the following table:-
17.6.1. Standard IO Digital Input/Output Parameters
Table Number:
17.6.1.
This page allows you to set up the Digital I/OParameters. The parameters which appeardepend upon the type of I/O configurated
STANDARD IO
(Dig IO1 to 7 Page)
Parameter Name Parameter Description Value Default AccessLevel
The first five parameters only appear if the digital IO channel is configured for timeproportioning output.
Min Pulse Time Minimum logic on or offtime.
Auto = 0.05sor0.1 to 999.9
20sec L3
Electrical Lo Electrical low input level Input range L3
Electrical Hi Electrical high input level Input range L3
Eng Value Lo Low display reading Display L3
Eng Value Hi High display reading range L3
Dig IO1 Val If configured as an outputthis reads the desired outputvalue
If configured as an input thisreads the state of the digitalinput
-100 to 100
or
0 = On
not 0 = Off
L3
or
R/O
Electrical Value The current electrical valueof the output demand signal.
If configured as a digitalinput this value is not shown
0 to 100or0 = Onnot 0 = Off
R/O
Standard IO 2704 Controller
17-12 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00
17.7. STANDARD IO DIAGNOSTIC PAGE PARAMETERS
This page allows you to inspect the status of Digital Input 8 or the IO Expander if fitted. It isa read only page for diagnostic purposes only. The parameters are shown in Table 17.7
Table Number:
17.7
This page allows you to inspect DigitalInput 8 or IO Expander status
STANDARD IO(Diagnostic Page)
Parameter Name Parameter Description Value Default AccessLevel
Dig In8 Val Status of digital input 8 OffOn
R/O
Dig In E1 Val Status of IO expander input OffOn
R/O
Bad Channels A bad input or output will bedisplayed as æ and will occurif the I/O is either a short oropen circuit
toæææææææ
R/O
2704 Controller Module IO
Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 18-1
18. CHAPTER 18 MODULE IO............................................... 218.1. WHAT IS MODULE IO?..........................................................................218.2. MODULE IDENTIFICATION.................................................................318.3. MODULE IO PARAMETERS .................................................................418.3.1. DC Control and DC Retransmission .........................................................518.3.2. Relay Output .............................................................................................618.3.3. Triac Output ..............................................................................................718.3.4. Triple Logic Output ..................................................................................818.3.5. Triple Logic and Triple Contact Input ......................................................818.3.6. PV Input....................................................................................................918.3.7. Transmitter Power Supply.......................................................................1018.3.8. Transducer Power Supply .......................................................................1018.3.9. Potentiometer Input.................................................................................1118.3.10. DC Input................................................................................................1218.3.11. Dual PV Input .......................................................................................1318.4. MODULE SCALING...............................................................................1518.4.1. The PV Input...........................................................................................1518.4.2. To Scale The PV Input:- .........................................................................1618.4.3. Output modules .......................................................................................1818.4.4. To Scale A Control Output:- ...................................................................1918.4.5. Retransmission Output ............................................................................2018.4.6. To Scale A Retransmission Output:- .......................................................2018.4.7. To Calibrate the Potentiometer input ......................................................21
Module IO 2704 Controller
18-2 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00
18. Chapter 18 Module IO
18.1. WHAT IS MODULE IO?
Additional analogue and digital IO is provided by the plug in IO modules. These modulescan be fitted in any of five slots (see Section 2.4.2). The type and position of any modulesfitted in the controller is shown in the order code printed on the label on the side of thecontroller. This can be checked against the order code in Appendix A of this manual.Modules are available as single channel, two channel or three channel IO as listed below
Module OrderCode
Displayed As Number of Channels
Change over relay
2 pin relay
Dual relay
R4
R2
RR
Form C Relay
Form A Relay
Dual Relay
1
1
2
Triac
Dual triac
T2
TT
Triac
Dual Triac
1
2
DC control D4 DC Control 1
DC retransmission D6 DC Retrans 1
PV input PV PV Input 1
Triple logic input
Triple contact input
TL
TK
Tri-Logic IP
Tri-Contact IP
3
3
Triple logic output TP Tri-Logic OP 3
24V transmitter supply MS Transmitter PSU 1
5VdcTransducer powersupply
G3 Transducer PSU 1
10VdcTransducer powersupply
G5 Transducer PSU 1
Potentiometer input VU Pot Input 1
Analogue input module
(2604/2704 dc Input)
AM DC Input 1
Dual PV input
(Dual Probe Input)
DP Dual PV In 2
Table 18-1: I/O Modules
Parameters for the above modules, such as input/output limits, filter times and scaling of theIO, can be adjusted in the Module IO pages. The procedures are very similar to those coveredin Chapter 17 ‘STANDARD IO’.
2704 Controller Module IO
Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 18-3
18.2. MODULE IDENTIFICATION
The first page which appears under the heading Module IO shows the type of module fitted ineach slot position.
Do This This Is The Display YouShould See
Additional Notes
If a module is fitted in anymodule position, it’s type,as listed in Table 18-1, isdisplayed.
No Module is displayed ifthe slot is empty.
This is a read onlydisplay.
5. Press to show the listof modules.
6. Press again to selectthe module
1. From any display press as many times as necessaryto access the page headermenu
2. Press or to select‘Module IO’
3. Press to show Sub-headers
4. Press or to select‘Idents’ (if necessary)
Module IO 2704 Controller
18-4 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00
18.3. MODULE IO PARAMETERS
To view and alter parameters associated with each module:-
Do This This Is The Display YouShould See
Additional Notes
2. Press to show the listof parameters for theselected module
3. Press again to selectthe first parameter
4. Press again to scrollto a parameter which youwish to change
5. Press or tochange its value
The following tables showthe parameters availablefor different module types
If the channel is not used themessage ‘No Parameters’ isdisplayed
If a module is not fitted inthe selected position thesub header is notdisplayed
(A), (B), (C ) refer to theoutput channel of asingle, dual or triplemodule respectively
1. From the MODULE IOsub-header display press
or to choose therequired module
2704 Controller Module IO
Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 18-5
18.3.1. DC Control and DC Retransmission
Table Number:18.3.1.
This page allows you to set up the parametersfor a DC Output module.
MODULE IO(Module 1(A))
Parameter Name Parameter Description Value Default AccessLevel
Ident DC Output DC Output R/O
Electrical Lo Electrical low input level O/P range L3.
See
Electrical Hi Electrical high input level O/P range ‘ToScale
Eng Value Lo Low display reading Disp. range Output
Eng Value Hi High display reading Disp. range Modules’
Electrical Val The current electrical valueof the output
Volts or mA R/O
Module 1 A Val The current value inengineering units.
Module 1 A can be a userdefined name
0 - 100% R/O
This module has a single output. Its parameters are displayed under ‘channel’ (A).
Module IO 2704 Controller
18-6 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00
18.3.2. Relay Output
Table Number:
18.3.2.
This page allows you to set the parameters fora Relay Output module.
Changeover relay Ident Form C Relay
2 Pin Relay Ident Form A Relay
Dual Relay Ident Dual Relay
MODULE IO(Module 4(A)
Page)
Parameter Name Parameter Description Value Default AccessLevel
Ident Relay R/O
The following five parameters only appear if the output is configured as ‘Time Proportion’.
Min Pulse Time Minimum relay on or off time Auto = 0.05sor0.1 to 999.9
20sec L3
Only
Electrical Lo Electrical low input level O/P range shown
Electrical Hi Electrical high input level O/P range for time
Eng Value Lo Low display reading Disp. range prop.
Eng Value Hi High display reading Disp. range O/Ps
Electrical Val The current electrical valueof the output
0.00 or 1.00 R/O
Module 4 A Val The current output value
Module 4 A can be a userdefined name
+ 100%
-ve valuesare shownbut not used
R/O
The changeover relay and 2 pin relay are single output modules. The parameters above aredisplayed under ‘channel’ (A) only.
Dual Relay has two outputs. The parameters above are displayed under Channel (A) andChannel (C ).
2704 Controller Module IO
Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 18-7
18.3.3. Triac Output
Table Number:
18.3.3.
This page allows you to set the parameters fora Triac Output module.
Triac Ident Triac
Dual Triac Ident Dual Triac
MODULE IO(Module x(A)
Page)
Parameter Name Parameter Description Value Default AccessLevel
Ident Triac R/O
The following five parameters only appear if the output is configured as ‘Time Proportion’.
Min Pulse Time Minimum relay on or off time Auto = 0.05sor0.1 to 999.9
20sec L3
Only
Electrical Lo Electrical low input level O/P range shown
Electrical Hi Electrical high input level O/P range for time
Eng Value Lo Low display reading Disp. range prop.
Eng Value Hi High display reading Disp. range O/Ps
Electrical Val The current electrical valueof the output
0.00 or 1.00 R/O
Module x A Val The current output value
Module x A can be a userdefined name
+ 100%
-ve valuesare shownbut not used
R/O
The triac output is a single output module. The parameters above are displayed under‘channel’ (A) only.
The dual triac has two outputs. The parameters above are displayed under Channel (A) andChannel (C ).
Module IO 2704 Controller
18-8 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00
18.3.4. Triple Logic Output
Table Number:
18.3.4.
This page allows you to set the parametersfor a Logic Output module.
MODULE IO(Module x(A) Page)
Parameter Name Parameter Description Value Default AccessLevel
Ident Logic Output R/O
The following five parameters only appear if the output is configured as ‘Time Proportion’.
Min Pulse Time Minimum relay on or off time Auto = 0.05sor0.1 to 999.9
20sec L3
Only
Electrical Lo Electrical low input level O/P range shown
Electrical Hi Electrical high input level O/P range for time
Eng Value Lo Low display reading Disp. range prop.
Eng Value Hi High display reading Disp. range O/Ps
Electrical Val The current electrical valueof the output
0.0 or 1.00 R/O
Module x A Val The current output value
Module x A can be a userdefined name
+ 99999
-ve valuesare shownbut not used
R/O
This module has three outputs. Each output is found under Module 1(A), (B) and (C ).
18.3.5. Triple Logic and Triple Contact Input
Table Number:
18.3.5.
This page allows you to set the parameters fora Triple Logic Input module.
MODULE IO(Module x(A)
Page)
Parameter Name Parameter Description Value Default AccessLevel
Ident Logic Input R/O
Module x A Val The current output value
Module x A can be a userdefined name
0
1
R/O
This module has three inputs. Each input is found under Module 1(A), (B) and (C ).
2704 Controller Module IO
Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 18-9
18.3.6. PV Input
Table Number:
18.3.7.
This page allows you to set the parameters fora PV Input module.
This module can only be fitted in slots 3 or 6.
MODULE IO(Module 3(A)
Page)
Parameter Name Parameter Description Value Default AccessLevel
Ident PV Input R/O
Electrical Lo Electrical low input level Input range L3.
Electrical Hi Electrical high input level units asconfigured
See ‘ToScale
Eng Value Lo Low display reading Display the PV
Eng Value Hi High display reading range Input’
Filter Time Input filter time Off to0:10:00.0
L3
Emissivity Emissivity
Pyrometer input only
Off to 1.00 L3
Electrical Val The current electrical valueof the input
Input rangeunits asconfigured
R/O
Module 3A (or 6A)Val
The current value inengineering units.
Module 3A can be a userdefined name.
R/O
Offset Transducer scale offset Displayrange
0 L3
Module Status Module status OKInitialisingCh A SbreakCh AOutRangeCh A IP SatCh A NotCalib
R/O
CJC Temp Temperature read at therear terminals oC
Thermocouple inputs only
R/O
SBrk Trip Imp Current sensor break value
Read as a % of the SBrkImpedance configured
R/O
This module has a single input. Its parameters are displayed under ‘channel’ (A).
Module IO 2704 Controller
18-10 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00
18.3.7. Transmitter Power Supply
Table Number:
18.3.9.
This page allows you to set the parametersfor a Transmitter Power Supply module.
MODULE IO(Module x(A) Page)
Parameter Name Parameter Description Value Default AccessLevel
Ident Transmitter PSU R/O
Module 1A Val The current value inengineering units.
Module 1A can be a userdefined name.
R/O
This module has a single output. Its parameters are displayed under ‘channel’ (A).
Channel (B) and channel (C ) show ‘No IO Channel’.
18.3.8. Transducer Power Supply
Table Number:
18.3.9.
This page allows you to set the parametersfor a Transducer Power Supply module.
MODULE IO(Module x(A) Page)
Parameter Name Parameter Description Value Default AccessLevel
Ident Transmitter PSU R/O
Module 1A Val The current value inengineering units.
Module 1A can be a userdefined name.
R/O
This module has a single output. Its parameters are displayed under ‘channel’ (A).
2704 Controller Module IO
Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 18-11
18.3.9. Potentiometer Input
Table Number:
18.3.9.
This page allows you to set the parameters fora Potentiometer Input module.
MODULE IO(Module x(A)
Page)
Parameter Name Parameter Description Value Default
AccessLevel
Ident Pot Input R/O
Filter Time Input filter time Off to 0:10:00.0 L3
Eng Val Lo Engineering value low Display range L3
Eng Val Hi Engineering value high Display range L3
Module 1A Val The current value inengineering units.
Module 1A can be a userdefined name.
R/O
Cal State Allows the potentiometer tobe calibrated. See section18.4.
Pot Low Pos
Pot High Pos
Idle L3
Module Status Module status OK
Initialising
Ch A Sbreak
Ch A OutRange
Ch A IP Sat
Ch A Not Calib
R/O
This module has a single input. Its parameters are displayed under ‘channel’ (A).
Channel (B) and channel (C ) show ‘No IO Channel’.
Module IO 2704 Controller
18-12 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00
18.3.10. DC Input
TableNumber:
18.3.10.
This page allows you to set the parameters for aDC Input module.
This module can only be fitted in slots 1, 3, 4 or 6.
MODULE IO(Module x(A)
Page)
Parameter Name Parameter Description Value Default AccessLevel
Ident PV Input R/O
Electrical Lo Electrical low input level Input range L3.
Electrical Hi Electrical high input level units asconfigured
See ‘ToScale
Eng Value Lo Low display reading Display the PV
Eng Value Hi High display reading range Input’
Filter Time Input filter time Off to0:10:00.0
L3
Emissivity Emissivity
Pyrometer input only
Off to 1.00 L3
Electrical Val The current electricalvalue of the input
Input rangeunits asconfigured
R/O
Module 3A (or 6A)Val
The current value inengineering units.
Module 3A can be a userdefined name.
R/O
Offset Transducer scale offset Display range 0 L3
Module Status Module status OKInitialisingCh A SbreakCh AOutRangeCh A IP SatCh A Not Calib
R/O
CJC Temp Temperature read at therear terminals oC
Thermocouple inputs only
R/O
SBrk Trip Imp Current sensor breakvalue
Read as a % of the SBrkImpedance configured
R/O
This module has a single input. Its parameters are displayed under ‘channel’ (A).
Channel (B) and channel (C ) show ‘No IO Channel’.
2704 Controller Module IO
Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 18-13
18.3.11. Dual PV Input
The dual PV input module accepts two inputs - one from a high level source (channel A) andone from a low level source (channel C). The two inputs are not isolated from each other andhave an update rate of 5Hz. A typical application for the module is for a zirconia probe input.The module can also be configured for a single input when the update rate becomes 10Hz.
Table Number:
18.3.11.
This page allows you to set the parameters forChannel A of a Dual PV Input module.
This module can only be fitted in slots 3 or 6.
MODULE IO(Module 3(A)
Page)
Parameter Name Parameter Description Value Default AccessLevel
This module has two inputs. Parameters are displayed under ‘channel’ (A) and ‘channel’ (C)
Channel A is the high level input, channel C is the low level input. This table shows Module3 (or 6)A parameters
Ident High Level Input R/O
Electrical Lo Electrical low input level Input range L3.
Electrical Hi Electrical high input level units asconfigured
See
Eng Value Lo Low display reading Display range ‘ToScale
Eng Value Hi High display reading Display range the PVInput’
Filter Time Input filter time Off to0:10:00.0
L3
Electrical Val The current electricalvalue of the input
Input range unitsas configured
R/O
Module 3A Val The current value inengineering units.
Module 3A can be a userdefined name.
R/O
Offset Transducer scale offset Range limits
Module Status Module status OKInitialisingCh A SbreakCh A OutRangeCh A IP SatCh A Not Calib
R/O
SBrk Trip Imp Current sensor breakvalue
Read as a % of the SBrkImpedance configured
R/O
Module IO 2704 Controller
18-14 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00
Table Number:
18.3.11.
This page allows you to set the parameters forChannel C of a Dual PV Input module.
This module can only be fitted in slots 3 or 6.
MODULE IO(Module 3(C)
Page)
Parameter Name Parameter Description Value Default AccessLevel
This module has two inputs. Parameters are displayed under ‘channel’ (A) and ‘channel’ (C)
Channel A is the high level input, channel C is the low level input. This table shows Module3 (or 6)C parameters
Ident Low Level Input R/O
Electrical Lo Electrical low input level Input range L3.
Electrical Hi Electrical high input level units asconfigured
See
Eng Value Lo Low display reading Display range ‘ToScale
Eng Value Hi High display reading Display range the PVInput’
Filter Time Input filter time Off to0:10:00.0
L3
Emissivity Emissivity
Pyrometer input only
Off to 1.00 L3
Electrical Val The current electricalvalue of the input
Input range unitsas configured
R/O
Module 3A Val The current value inengineering units.
Module 3A can be a userdefined name.
R/O
Offset Transducer scale offset Range limits
CJC Temp Temperature read at therear terminals oC
Thermocouple inputs only
R/O
SBrk Trip Imp Current sensor breakvalue
Read as a % of the SBrkImpedance configured
R/O
Channel Name Channel name DefaultText
R/O
2704 Controller Module IO
Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 18-15
18.4. MODULE SCALING
The IO modules are scaled as already described in Chapter 17 for the fixed inputs andoutputs. The procedures are repeated below:-
18.4.1. The PV InputScaling of the PV input applies to linear process inputs, eg linearised transducers, where it isnecessary to match the displayed reading to the electrical input levels from the transducer.PV input scaling is not provided for direct thermocouple or RTD inputs.Figure 18-1 shows an example of input scaling. where an electrical input of 4-20mA requiresthe display to read 2.5 to 200.0 units.
Figure 18-1: Input Scaling (Modules)
Electrical Loeg 4 mA
Electrical Input
DisplayReading
Engineeringvalueeg 200.0
Engineeringvalueeg 2.5
Electrical Hieg 20 mA
Module IO 2704 Controller
18-16 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00
18.4.2. To Scale The PV Input:-
Do This This Is The Display YouShould See
Additional Notes
Set this value to thelowest level of the input,eg 4mA.
Set this value to thehighest level of the input ,eg 20mA.
5. Press to show the listof parameters.
6. Press or toscroll to ‘Electrical Lo’
7. Press to select theElectrical Lo .
8. Press or tochange the value
9. Press to select the‘Electrical Hi’ .
10. Press or tochange the value
1. From any display press as many times as necessaryto access the page headermenu
2. Press or to select‘Module IO’
3. Press to show Sub-headers
4. Press or tochoose the slot in whichthe PV Input module isfitted
2704 Controller Module IO
Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 18-17
11. Press to select theEng Val Lo .
12. Press or tochange the value
13. Press to select theEng Val Hi .
14. Press or tochange the value
[Units] If units have been selected in configuration level they will be displayed here.
The choices are:-oC/oF/oKV, mV, A, mAPHmmHg, psi, bar, mbar, mmWg, inWg, inWW, PSIGOhms%, %RH, %O2, %CO2, %CP,PPMCustom units are also possible
Set up the displayedvalue (instrumentminimum span) whichcorresponds to theElectrical Lo input, eg 2
Set up the displayedvalue (instrumentmaximum span) whichcorresponds to theElectrical Hi input, eg200.00
Module IO 2704 Controller
18-18 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00
18.4.3. Output modulesIf the output module is DC or if it is a relay, triac or logic used as time proportioning control,it can be scaled such that a lower and upper level of PID demand signal can limit theoperation of the output value. This is shown in Figure 18-2 applied to a relay output or anytime proportioning output..
By default, the relay will be fully off for 0% power demand, fully on for 100% power demandand equal on/off times at 50% power demand. You can change these limits to suit theprocess. It is important to note, however, that these limits are set to safe values for theprocess. For example, for a heating process it may be required to maintain a minimum levelof temperature. This can be achieved by applying an offset at 0% power demand which willmaintain the relay on for a period of time. Care must be taken to ensure that this minimum onperiod does not cause the process to overheatThese offsets can be made to parameters in the relevant Module IO pages.
If the output is DC the electrical low and electrical high parameters are analogue values andcan be set as in the example given for DC Output Retransmission, section 18.4.3.
Figure 18-2: Time Proportioning Relay, Triac or Logic Output
Electrical Loeg RelayPermanently off
Í
Electrical Output. Inthis example theon/off ratio of theoutput relay
PID Demandsignal
Eng Value Hieg 100%
Eng Value Loeg 0%
Electrical Hieg Relaypermanently on
Î
2704 Controller Module IO
Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 18-19
18.4.4. To Scale A Control Output:-
Do This This Is The Display YouShould See
Additional Notes
Set this to a low value,normally 0.
1. From the MODULE IO sub-
header display, Press
or to choose the slot inwhich the Output module isfitted
2. Press to show the listof parameters.
3. Press or toscroll to ‘Electrical Lo’
4. Press to select theElectrical Lo .
Set up this value so thatthe relay (triac or logic)switches fully offcorresponding to theElectrical Low setting
Set this to a high value,normally 100.
Set up this value so thatthe relay (triac or logic)switches fully oncorresponding to theElectrical High setting
5. Press to select theElectrical Hi .
6. Press or tochange the value
7. Press to select theEng Val Lo .
8. Press or tochange the value
9. Press to select theEng Val Hi .
10. Press or tochange the value
Module IO 2704 Controller
18-20 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00
18.4.5. Retransmission OutputThe retransmission output can be scaled so that the output value corresponds to range of thesignal to be retransmitted.Figure 18-3 shows an example where the retransmitted signal is PV or SP where an electricaloutput of 4-20mA represents 20.0 to 200.0 units.
Figure 18-3: Scaling a Retransmission Output
18.4.6. To Scale A Retransmission Output:-
This is identical to that described in Section 18.4.1.1.
Electrical Loeg 4 mA
Electrical Output
DisplayReading
Display Hieg 200.0
Display Loeg 20.0
Electrical Hieg 20 mA
2704 Controller Module IO
Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 18-21
18.4.7. To Calibrate the Potentiometer input
The value of the potentiometer input is read by the parameter ‘Module xA Val’, where x is thenumber of the slot in which the Pot input module is fitted. This parameter can be scaled toread the value of the potentiometer input or as a percentage as required.
To calibrate the potentiometer input:-
Do This This Is The Display YouShould See
Additional Notes
This will set the minimumreading when the potposition is at minimum
7. Press to scroll to CalState
8. Press or toselect ‘Pot Low Pos’
9. Adjust the potentiometerto minimum position
10. To confirm, press or
to select ‘Go’.
(You can also select‘Abort’ at this point)
1. Access the Pot Inputparameter list from theMODULE IO (Module xA)page header
2. Press or to scrollto ‘Eng Val Lo
3. ’ Press to select ‘EngVal Lo
4. Press or to changeits value
5. Press to select ‘EngVal Hi’
6. Press or tochange its value
This will set the maximumreading when the potposition is at maximum
To calibrate follow theinstructions on thedisplay.
When the controller iscalibrating the message‘Doing Fine Cal’appears.
When the controller hasfinished the message‘Passed’ appears.
Press or to‘Accept’. After 0.5 secthe display will revert to‘Idle’ completing theprocedure.
To Calibrate the Potentiometer Minimum Position
Module IO 2704 Controller
18-22 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00
11. Press or toselect ‘Pot High Pos’
12. Adjust the potentiometerto maximum position
13. To confirm, press or
to select ‘Go’.(You can also select‘Abort’ at this point)
To calibrate follow theinstructions on thedisplay.
When the controller iscalibrating the message‘Doing Fine Cal’appears.
When the controller hasfinished the message‘Passed’ appears.
Press or to‘Accept’. After 0.5 secthe display will revert to‘Idle’ completing theprocedure.
You can also ‘Abort’ atthis stage.
To Calibrate the Potentiometer Maximum Position
11. The parameter ‘Module 1x Val’ now indicate the potentiometer position between 0 and1000 (ohms), as set in this example.
Note:-When this parameter is highlighted, the units are displayed in the upper right of the displaybanner.
The units and resolution will have been set in configuration level.
2704 Controller Transducer Scaling
Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 19-1
19. CHAPTER 19 TRANSDUCER SCALING ......................... 219.1. WHAT IS TRANSDUCER SCALING?...................................................219.2. SHUNT CALIBRATION ..........................................................................319.2.1. To Calibrate a Strain Gauge Bridge Transducer .......................................419.3. LOAD CELL CALIBRATION.................................................................519.3.1. To Calibrate a Load Cell...........................................................................719.4. COMPARISON CALIBRATION ............................................................819.4.1. To Calibrate a Controller Against a Second Reference.............................919.5. AUTO-TARE CALIBRATION ..............................................................1119.5.1. To Use the Auto-Tare Feature.................................................................1119.6. TRANSDUCER SCALING PARAMETERS ........................................1319.6.1. Parameter Notes ......................................................................................14
Transducer Scaling 2704 Controller
19-2 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr -00
19. Chapter 19 Transducer Scaling
19.1. WHAT IS TRANSDUCER SCALING?
Transducer scaling is a software function block which provides a method of offsetting thecalibration of the controller input when compared to a known input source. Transducerscaling is often performed as a routine operation on a machine to take out system errors. Inthe case of a load cell, for example, it may be necessary to zero the scale when a load isremoved.
Transducer scaling can be applied to any input or derived input, i.e. the PV Input, AnalogueInput or Modules 1, 3, 4, 5, or 6. In practice, however, it is unlikely that transducer scalingwould be required on every input and so the 2704 controller includes three transducercalibration function blocks. These can be wired in configuration level to any three of theabove inputs.
Four types of calibration are explained in this chapter:-
1. Shunt Calibration
2. Load Cell Calibration
3. Comparison Calibration
4. Auto-tare
2704 Controller Transducer Scaling
Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 19-3
19.2. SHUNT CALIBRATION
Shunt calibration is so called since it refers to switching a calibration resistor across one armof the four wire measurement bridge in a strain gauge transducer. It also requires the use of aTransducer Power Supply module wired as shown in Figure 2-13.
The strain gauge transducer is calibrated as follows:1. Remove any load from the transducer to establish a zero reference.2. Enter ‘Scale Low’ and ‘Scale High’ values which are normally set at 0% and 80% of the
span of the transducer.3. Start the procedure using the low point calibration parameter ‘Start Pnt1 Cal’, or a digital
input wired to this parameter.
The controller will automatically perform the following sequence:1. Disconnect the shunt resistor2. Calculate the low point calibration value by continuously averaging two lots of 50
measurements of the input until stable readings are obtained3. Connect the shunt resistor4. Calculate the high point calibration value by averaging two lots of 50 measurements of
the input
Figure 19-1: Strain Gauge Calibration
AB
D
C
Transducer power supply
Strain gauge
Controller underCalibration
Transducer Scaling 2704 Controller
19-4 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr -00
19.2.1. To Calibrate a Strain Gauge Bridge TransducerThe controller must have been configured for Cal Type = Shunt, and the transducerconnected as shown in Figure 2-13 using the ‘Transducer Power Supply’. Then:-
Do This This Is The Display YouShould See
Additional Notes
The choices are :Txdcr 1Txdcr 2Txdcr 3
This text can be userdefined
5. Press to show theparameter list
6. Press again to selectEnable Cal
7. Press or to On
This parameter remains‘On’ once it has been set.It requires to be switched‘Off’ manually.
It may be wired to anexternal digital inputsource such as a keyswitch
1. From any display press as many times as necessaryto access the page headermenu
2. Press or to select‘TXDCR SCALING’
3. Press to show Sub-headers
4. Press or to select‘Txdcr 1’ (or 2 or 3)
It is first necessary to enable calibration as follows:-
2704 Controller Transducer Scaling
Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 19-5
Note:-It is possible to start the calibration procedure before the system has settled at a stable value.The controller continuously takes blocks of 50 samples. When the average value betweentwo consecutive blocks is within the ‘Threshold Value’ the controller will then calibrate.The Threshold Value defaults to 0.5 but can be adjusted in configuration level. If thereadings are not stable within this period the controller will abort the calibration.
In this example a value of8000 is chosen whichmay represent 80% of the0 -10,000psi range of apressure transducer.
10. Press to scroll toScale High
11. Press or toenter the high endcalibration value
12. Press to scroll toStart Pnt 1 Cal
13. Press or toenter On
- Tip: To backscroll hold down and press
This will normally be zero8. Press as many times
as necessary to scroll toScale Low
9. Press or toenter the low endcalibration value
The controller automatically performs the procedure described in Section 19-2. During thistime the Cal Active parameter will change to On. When this parameter value changes back toOff the calibration is complete.
The Shunt State parameter will also change during the procedure to show when it is beingconnected (On = connected, Off = disconnected).
This parameter can beconfigured to be initiatedfrom a digital input andwired, for example, to anexternal switch. If thishas been configured thisparameter can be turnedon from this source.
Set the strain gauge bridge to its ‘zeroed’ condition
Transducer Scaling 2704 Controller
19-6 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr -00
19.3. LOAD CELL CALIBRATION
A load cell with V, mV or mA output may be connected to the PV Input, Analogue Input orModules 1, 3, 4, 5, 6 supplied as analogue inputs. The wiring connections are shown inSections 2.3.3, 2.3.4, and 2.4.2 respectively.
The load cell is calibrated as follows:1. Remove any load and start the procedure using the low point calibration parameter ‘Start
Pnt1 Cal’, or a digital input wired to this parameter. The controller will calculate the lowcalibration point
2. Place a reference weight on the load cell and turn on the high point calibration parameter‘Start Pnt2 Cal’, or a digital input wired to this parameter. The controller will thencalculate the high calibration point.
Note:-If ‘Start Pnt1 Cal’ = ‘On’, ‘Start Pnt2 Cal’ cannot be turned to ‘On’.If ‘Start Pnt2 Cal’ = ‘On’, ‘Start Pnt1 Cal’ cannot be turned to ‘On’.Either must complete before the other can be set to ‘On’.
Figure 19-2: Load Cell Calibration
Load Cell
Reference Weight
Controller underCalibration
2704 Controller Transducer Scaling
Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 19-7
19.3.1. To Calibrate a Load CellThe controller must have been configured for Cal Type = Load Cell, and the transducerconnected as shown in Chapter 2. Then:-
Do This This Is The Display YouShould See
Additional Notes
Note:-‘Scale High’ is the high calibration point and ‘Scale Low’ is the low calibration point. Theseshould be set to the range over which calibration is required. ‘Threshold Value’ applies as inthe previous section.
Enable calibration as described in steps 1-7 of section 19.2.1.
Then set the load cell to its ‘zeroed’ condition
3. Press to scroll toStart Pnt2 Cal
4. Press or to On
1. Press as many timesas necessary to scroll to‘Start Pnt1 Cal’
2. Press or to ‘On’
It can be configured to beinitiated from a digitalinput and wired, forexample, to an externalswitch. If this has beenconfigured this parametercan be turned on fromthis source.
This parameter can beconfigured so that it isactivated from a digitalinput and wired, forexample, to an externalswitch. If this has beenconfigured this parametercan be turned on fromthis source.
During the time taken forthe controller to calculatethe low point calibrationvalue, the Cal Activeparameter will be On.
When the Calibration low procedure is complete, place the reference load on the loadcell
Transducer Scaling 2704 Controller
19-8 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr -00
19.4. COMPARISON CALIBRATION
Comparison calibration is most appropriate when calibrating the controller against a secondreference instrument.
In this case the process calibration points are not entered ahead of performing the calibration.The input may be set to any value and, when the system is stable, a reading is taken from thereference measurement device and entered into the controller. The controller stores both thisnew target value and the actual reading taken from its input.The process is repeated at a different value, with the controller storing both the new targetvalue and the reading taken from its input.
Figure 19-3: Comparison Calibration
ReferenceMeasurement
Device
Load
Controller underCalibration
ReferenceTransducer
MeasurementTransducer
2704 Controller Transducer Scaling
Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 19-9
19.4.1. To Calibrate a Controller Against a Second Reference
Do This This Is The Display YouShould See
Additional Notes
10. Press as many timesas necessary to scroll to‘Adjust Value’
11. Press or to enterthe value indicated on thereference instrument
12. Press to confirm or
to cancel asinstructed
8. Press as many timesas necessary to scroll to‘Start Pnt1 Cal’
9. Press or to ‘On’
The confirm messagedoes not appear unless‘Adjust Value’ is changed.
If the displayed value isacceptable change itmomentarily then back tothe value to step to thenext stage.
On confirm the currentinput value is stored as‘Input Low’ and the valueentered by the user isstored in the ‘Scale Low’parameter.
This parameter can beconfigured to be activatedfrom a digital input andwired, for example, to anexternal switch. If thishas been configured thisparameter can be turnedon from this source.
Enable calibration as described in steps 1-7 of section 19.2.1.
Then allow the process to settle at the low calibration point
Transducer Scaling 2704 Controller
19-10 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr -00
Allow the Process to settle at the high calibration point
13. Press to ‘Start Pnt2Cal’
14. Press or to ‘On’
This parameter can beconfigured to be initiatedfrom a digital input andwired, for example, to anexternal switch. If thishas been configured thisparameter can be turnedon from this source.
It is possible to perform either low or high points in isolation, or to calibrate both pointsconsecutively as described above.
15. Press as many timesas necessary to scroll to‘Adjust Value’
16. Press or toenter the value indicatedon the referenceinstrument
17. Press to confirm or
to cancel asinstructed
The confirm messagedoes not appear unless‘Adjust Value’ is changed.
If the displayed value isacceptable change itmomentarily then back tothe value to step to thenext stage.
On confirm the currentinput value is stored as‘Input High’ and the valueentered by the user isstored in the ‘Scale High’parameter.
2704 Controller Transducer Scaling
Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 19-11
19.5. AUTO-TARE CALIBRATION
The auto-tare function is used, for example, when it is required to weigh the contents of acontainer but not the container itself.The procedure is to place the empty container on the weigh bridge and ‘zero’ the controller.Since it is likely that following containers may have different tare weights the auto-tarefeature is always available in the controller at access level 1.
19.5.1. To Use the Auto-Tare FeatureFirstly, access the transducer scaling parameters as follows:-
Do This This Is The Display YouShould See
Additional Notes
The choices are :Txdcr 1Txdcr 2Txdcr 3
This can be user defined text
5. Press to show theparameter list
6. Press again to selectEnable Cal
7. Press or to On(if necessary)
This parameter remains‘On’ once it has been set.It requires to be switched‘Off’ manually.It may be wired to anexternal digital input sourcesuch as a key switch
1. From any display press as many times as necessaryto access the page headermenu
2. Press or to select‘TXDCR SCALING’
3. Press to show Sub-headers
4. Press or to select‘Txdcr 1’ (or 2 or 3)
Transducer Scaling 2704 Controller
19-12 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr -00
Then follow the auto-tare calibration as follows:-
Do This This Is The Display YouShould See
Additional Notes
The effect of auto-tare is to introduce a DC bias to the measurement, as shown in Figure 19-1below.
Figure 19-4: Effect of Auto-Tare
Note:- A Tare calibration will change the values of ‘Scale High’ and ‘Scale Low’.
1. Set the equipment at the normal tare point, eg place the empty container on theweigh bridge
3. Press as many timesas necessary to scroll to‘Start Tare’
4. Press or to ‘On’
1. Press to ‘Tare Value’
2. Press or to enterthe required value
This will normally be zero.
When once set it will onlybe necessary to accessthis parameter again if anew tare value isrequired.
This parameter can beconfigured to be initiatedfrom a digital input andwired, for example, to anexternal switch. If thishas been configured thisparameter can be turnedon from this source.
Input Low Input HighInput at auto-tare point
New Scale High
Scale High
Tare value
PV at tare point
New Scale Low
Scale Low
Tareoffset
Tareoffset
Tareoffset
Original Scaling
New Scaling
2704 Controller Transducer Scaling
Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 19-13
19.6. TRANSDUCER SCALING PARAMETERS
Table Number:18.3.1.
This page shows the Transducer Scalingparameters.
TXDCR SCALING(Txdcr 1)
Parameter Name Parameter Description Value Default AccessLevel
Enable Cal (1) Enable calibration OffOn
Off L3
Start Tare (2) Start auto-tare calibration OffOn
Off L1
Start Pnt1 Cal (3) Start the calibration at point1, normally the low point
OffOn
Off L1
Start Pnt2 Cal (4) Start the calibration at point2, normally the low point
OffOn
Off L1
Clear Cal (5) Clear previous calibrationvalues
Off
On
Off L3
Tare Value Sets the value that thecontroller will read after anauto-tare calibration
Displayrange
L3
Input Low Sets the scaling input lowpoint
L3
Input High Sets the scaling input highpoint
L3
Scale Low Sets the scaling output lowpoint
L3
Scale High Sets the scaling output highpoint
L3
Threshold Val (6) The allowed differencebetween two consecutiveaverages during calibration
0 - 99.999mins
L3
Shunt State (7) Indicates that the shuntresistor is connected or not
Off
On
L3 R/O
Cal Active Indicates calibration inprogress
Off
On
L3 R/O
Scaled Value Output from the scalingblock. Used for diagnosticpurposes only
R/O
Adjust Value Sets the value read by thereference source incomparison calibration only
L1
OP Status Output status based oninput status and scaled PV
Good
Bad
R/O
Transducer Scaling 2704 Controller
19-14 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr -00
19.6.1. Parameter Notes
1. Enable Cal This may be wired to a digital input for an external switch. If notwired, then the value may be changed.
When enabled the transducer parameters may be altered as describedin the previous sections. When the parameter has been turned On itwill remain on until turned off manually even if the controller ispowered cycled.
2. Start Tare This may be wired to a digital input for an external switch. If notwired, then the value may be changed.
3. Start Pnt1 Cal This may be wired to a digital input for an external switch. If notwired, then the value may be changed.It starts the calibration procedure for:1. Shunt Calibration2. The low point for Load Cell Calibration3. The low point for Comparison Calibration
4. Start Pnt2 Cal This may be wired to a digital input for an external switch. If notwired, then the value may be changed.It starts the calibration procedure for:1. The high point for Load Cell Calibration2. The high point for Comparison Calibration
5. Clear Cal This may be wired to a digital input for an external switch. If notwired, then the value may be changed.When enabled the input will reset to default values. A new calibrationwill overwrite the previous calibration values if Clear Cal is notenabled between calibrations.
6. Threshold Val The input needs to settle within a range which has been set inconfiguration level. The threshold value sets the required settling timefor shunt, load cell and auto-tare calibration.
7. Shunt This parameter is an output from the function block which can bewired to a transducer scale module to close the shunt circuit andintroduce the calibration resistor. It may be used in copy and pastewiring.
2704 Controller Diagnostics
Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 20-1
20. CHAPTER 20 DIAGNOSTICS .......................................... 220.1. WHAT IS DIAGNOSTICS? .....................................................................220.1.1. Diagnostics parameters .............................................................................2
Diagnostics 2704 Controller
20-2 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00
20. Chapter 20 Diagnostics
20.1. WHAT IS DIAGNOSTICS?
Diagnostics are displayed in Access Level 3 only and provide information on the internalstate of the controller. They are intended for use in advanced fault finding situations. Up toeight error messages can be listed and each error message displays a message showing thestate of the controller. The error messages are shown in Note 1.The diagnostic parameters are listed below:-
20.1.1. Diagnostics parameters
Table Number:
20.1.1
This page allows you to inspect diagnosticinformation
DIAGNOSTICS
Parameter Name Parameter Description Value Default AccessLevel
Error Count Number of errors recorded R/O
Error 1 R/O
Error 2 R/O
Error 3 R/O
Error 4 Historical errors where 1 is See R/O
Error 5 the most recent Note 1 R/O
Error 6 R/O
Error 7 R/O
Error 8 R/O
CPU % Free A measure of the loading onthe CPU
R/O
Con Task Ticks A measure of the activity of R/O
UI Task 1 Ticks the algorithm R/O
UI Task 2 Ticks R/O
Power FF Power feedback. Measuresthe supply voltage to thecontroller
R/O
Power Failures A count of the number ofpower failures
R/O
2704 Controller Diagnostics
Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 20-3
Note 1.Possible error messages:-
OK
Bad Ident
Bad Fact Cal
Module Changed
DFC1 Error, DFC2 Error, DFC3 Error
Module N/A
CBC Comms Error
Cal Store Error
CBC Cal Error
Bad PV Input
Bad Mod3 Input, Bad Mod4 Input, Bad Mod6 Input,
Bad An Input
Bad NVOL Check
Bad X Board
Bad Res Ident
Bad SPI SemRel
Bad CW EETrans
Bad Prog Data
Bad Prog Csum
SegPool Over
SPI Locked
SPI Queue Full
HighP Lockout
Pro Mem Full
Invalid Seg
Program Full
Invalid Prog
Bad Logic 1 to Bad Logic 7
CPU Add Err
Calc CRC Err
Bad Cal Restore
Bad Cust Lin
Bad Instruct
Bad Slot Instr
DMA Addr Err
Reserved Int
Undefined Int
SPC Init Err
Diagnostics 2704 Controller
20-4 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00
2704 Controller Appendix A
Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 A-1
A. APPENDIX A ORDER CODE............................................. 2A. HARDWARE CODE .....................................................................................2B. QUICK START CODE..................................................................................3
Appendix A 2704 Controller
A-2 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00
A. Appendix A Order Code
A. HARDWARE CODE
The 2704 controller has a modular hardware construction, which accepts up to six plug-inmodules and two communications modules. Eight digital IO and a relay form part of thefixed hardware build.
1 Controller Type2704 Standard2704f Profibus
2 Supply VoltageVH 85-264VacVL 20-29Vac/dc
3 Loops/ProgramsFirst Digit1_ _ One Loop2_ _ Two Loop3_ _ Three LoopSecond Digit_XX No Programs_2_ 20 Programs (1)
_5_ 50 ProgramsThird Digit_ XX No Programs_ _1 1 Profile_ _2 2 Profile_ _3 3 Profile
4Application
XX StandardZC Zirconia
5 - 9 I/O Slots 1 3 4 5 6XX None FittedR4 Change Over RelayR2 2 Pin RelayRR Dual RelayT2 TriacTT Dual TriacD4 DC ControlD6 DC RetransmissionPV PV Input(slots 3 & 6
only)TL Triple Logic InputTK Triple Contact InputTP Triple Logic OutputMS 24Vdc Transmitter
PSUVU Potentiometer InputG3 5Vdc transducer PSUG5 10Vdc transducer
PSUAM Analogue Input
module (not slot 5)DP Dual DC input (4)
(slots 3 & 6 only)
15 Config ToolsXX NoneIT iTools
10 MemoryModule
XX Not Fitted
13Manual
ENG EnglishFRA FrenchGER GermanNED DutchSPA SpainSWE SwedenITA Italian
11 - 12 Comms HJ
First Slot onlyPB ProfibusBoth SlotsXX None FittedA2 EIA-232Y2 2 wire EIA-485F2 4 wire EIA-485
14 Toolkit FunctionsXX StandardU1 16 An & 16 DigU2 24 An & 32 Dig
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Hardware Code Example
2704/VH/323/XX/RR/PV/D4/TP/PV/XX/A2/XX/ENG/U1/IT
Three loop controller with capability to store 20 three profile programs. Supply voltage 85 - 264 Vac.Modules: 2 x PV input, 1 x Dual relay, 1 x DC control, 1 x Triple logic output, EIA-232 Comms.16 analogue and 32 digital operations and iTools supplied with controller.
Hardware notes:2. Programmer includes 8 digital
operations3. Toolkit 1 includes 16 analogue,
16 digital, event groups & 4 uservalues
4. Toolkit 2 includes Toolkit 1 plusextra 8 analogue, 16 digitaloperations and 8 user values
5. Dual analogue input suitable forcarbon probes
2704 Controller Appendix A
Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00 A-3
B. QUICK START CODE
The controller supplied in accordance with the hardware code on the previous page requiresto be configured. Configuration is carried out using iTools. Alternatively, for simpleapplications the controller may be supplied pre-configured using the following code:-
1 - 3 Loop functionXXXX NoneS___ Standard PIDC___ CascadeR___ RatioO___ Override (7)
_PID PID control_ONF On/Off control_PIF PID/OnOff control_VP1 VP w/o feedback_VP2 VP with feedback
4 - 6 Process inputs(Input type)
X NoneJ J ThermocoupleK K ThermocoupleT T ThermocoupleL L ThermocoupleN N ThermocoupleR R ThermocoupleS S ThermocoupleB B ThermocoupleP P ThermocoupleC C ThermocoupleZ RTD/PT100A 4-20mA linearY 0-20mA linearV 0-10Vdc linearW 0-5Vdc linearG 1-5Vdc linearCustom (Replace C)Q Custom curveD D ThermocoupleE E Thermocouple1 Ni/Ni18%Mo2 Pt20%Rh/Pt40%Rh3 W/W26%Re(Eng)4 W/W26%Re(Hos)5 W5%Re/W26%Re(Eng)6 W5%Re/W26%Re(Hos)7 Pt10%Rh/Pt40%Rh8 Exergen K80 IR Pyro
7 Analogue inputXXX NoneP2_ PV Loop 2P3_ PV Loop 3S1_ SP Loop 1S2_ SP Loop 2S3_ SP Loop 3A1_ Aux PV Loop 1A2_ Aux PV Loop 2A3_ Aux PV Loop 3L1_ Ratio lead PV Loop
1L2_ Ratio lead PV Loop
2L3_ Ratio lead PV Loop
3Input rangeSelect third digit from table 1
Table 1A 4-20mA linearY 0-20mA linearV 0-10Vdc linearW 0-5Vdc linearG 1-5Vdc linear
8 - 12 Slot functionLoop numberXXX Unconfigured1__ Loop No 12__ Loop No 23__ Loop No 3Single relay or triac_HX Heat_CX CoolDual relay or triac_HC PID Heat & Cool_VH VP Heat_AA FSH & FSH_AB FSH & FSL_AC DH & DL_AD FSH & DH_AE FSL & DLHHX Heat O/P lps 1 & 2P12 Prog events 1 & 2P34 Prog events 3 & 4P56 Prog events 5 & 6P78 Prog events 7 & 8Triple logic output_HX Ch1 Heat_CX Ch1 Cool_HC Ch1 Heat, Ch2 CoolHHX Heat O/P lps 1 & 2HHH Heat O/P lps 1,2 & 3DC outputs_H_ PID Heat_C_ PID Cool_T_ PV Retransmission_S_ SP RetransmissionFor output range select third digitfrom table 1Precision PV input_PV PV input Module_PA Aux PV Input (8)
_PL Ratio lead inputAnalogue Input *_R_ SetpointAux & lead PV inputs *_L_ Ratio lead input_B_ Aux PV input* For input range select third digitfrom table 1Potentiometer input_VF VP Feedback_RS Remote SP
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Appendix A 2704 Controller
A-4 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 1.0 Apr-00
Notes
1. Loop 1 PV defaults to main input on microboard. Loop 2 and 3 PV inputs must be fittedin I/O slots 3 or 6 or be assigned to the analogue input.
2. This alarm configuration refers to loop alarms only. One selection per loop is allowed.Additional alarms are available for the user to configure.
3. Thermocouple and RTD inputs assume sensor min and max values with no decimal point.4. Linear inputs are ranged 0-100%, no decimal point.5. Temperature inputs will be C unless ordered by USA where F will be supplied.6. Remote setpoints assume loop min & max ranges.7. VP1 or VP2 not available with override function.8. For cascade and override inputs only.
Quick start code example:
SVP1/SPID/SPID/K/Z/A/S1A/1VH/2PV/2HV/3HC/3PV
This code configures the hardware specified on page A2 to be:
Loop1: Valve position control, Type K input, Ch1 VP output in slot 1, 4-20mA remotesetpoint input.Loop 2: PID control, RTD input in slot 3, 0-10Vdc Ch1 output in slot 4.Loop 3: PID control, 4-20mA input in slot 6, Logic Ch1/Ch2 output in slot 5.
2704 Controller Safety and EMC Information
Engineering Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 2.0 Apr-00 B-1
B. APPENDIX B SAFETY AND EMC INFORMATION ........... 2B.1. SAFETY .......................................................................................................2B.1.1. Electromagnetic compatibility....................................................................2B.2. SERVICE AND REPAIR ...........................................................................2B.2.1. Electrostatic discharge precautions ............................................................2B.2.2. Cleaning .....................................................................................................2B.3. INSTALLATION SAFETY REQUIREMENTS ......................................3B.3.1. Safety Symbols...........................................................................................3B.3.2. Personnel ....................................................................................................3B.3.3. Enclosure of live parts ................................................................................3B.3.4. Isolation......................................................................................................3B.3.5. Wiring ........................................................................................................4B.3.6. Power Isolation...........................................................................................4B.3.7. Earth leakage current..................................................................................4B.3.8. Overcurrent protection ...............................................................................5B.3.9. Voltage rating.............................................................................................5B.3.10. Conductive pollution ................................................................................5B.3.11. Over-temperature protection.....................................................................6B.3.12. Grounding of the temperature sensor shield .............................................6B.4. INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS FOR EMC ...................................6B.4.1. Routing of wires .........................................................................................6
Safety and EMC Information 2704 Controller
B-2 Engineering Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 2.0 Apr-00
B. Appendix B Safety and EMC InformationThis controller is manufactured in the UK by Eurotherm Controls Ltd.
Please read this section carefully before installing the controller
This controller is intended for industrial temperature and process control applications when itwill meet the requirements of the European Directives on Safety and EMC. Use in otherapplications, or failure to observe the installation instructions of this handbook may impairthe safety or EMC protection provided by the controller. It is the responsibility of theinstaller to ensure the safety and EMC of any particular installation.
B.1. SAFETY
This controller complies with the European Low Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC, amended by93/68/EEC, by the application of the safety standard EN 61010.
B.1.1. Electromagnetic compatibilityThis controller conforms with the essential protection requirements of the EMC Directive89/336/EEC, amended by 93/68/EEC, by the application of a Technical Construction File.This instrument satisfies the general requirements for heavy/light industrial andresidential/commercial environments as described by EN 50081-1 and EN 50082-2. Formore information on product compliance refer to the Technical Construction File.
B.2. SERVICE AND REPAIR
This controller has no user serviceable parts. Contact your supplier for repair.
Caution: Charged capacitors
Before removing an instrument from its sleeve, disconnect the supply and wait at least twominutes to allow capacitors to discharge. Failure to observe this precaution will exposecapacitors that may be charged with hazardous voltages. In any case, avoid touching theexposed electronics of an instrument when withdrawing it from the sleeve.
B.2.1. Electrostatic discharge precautionsWhen the controller is removed from its sleeve, some of the exposed electronic componentsare vulnerable to damage by electrostatic discharge from someone handling the controller.To avoid this, before handling the unplugged controller discharge yourself to ground.
B.2.2. CleaningDo not use water or water based products to clean labels or they will become illegible.Isopropyl alcohol may be used to clean labels. A mild soap solution may be used to cleanother exterior surfaces of the product.
2704 Controller Safety and EMC Information
Engineering Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 2.0 Apr-00 B-3
B.3. INSTALLATION SAFETY REQUIREMENTS
B.3.1. Safety SymbolsVarious symbols are used on the instrument, they have the following meaning:
Caution, (refer to the accompanying documents)
Functional earth (ground) terminal!
The functional earth connection is not required for safety purposes but to ground RFI filters.
B.3.2. PersonnelInstallation must only be carried out by qualified personnel.
B.3.3. Enclosure of live partsTo prevent hands or metal tools touching parts that may be electrically live, the controllermust be installed in an enclosure.
B.3.4. IsolationThe fixed digital I/O and analogue input are not isolated. The PV Input and all plug inmodules are fully isolated. This is shown in Figure B-1.
The Analogue Input is a self biased differential input suitable for either grounded or floatingtransducers of low output impedance generating signal in the range of +/-10V or +/-20mA(with a burden resistor of 100 Ohms across + and - terminals).This input is neither isolated from the instrument ground (which can be earthed via fixed I/Oports) nor isolated from the instrument earth terminal, therefore, under no circumstancesshould mains potentials be applied to any of its inputs.In order for the Input to operate safely the common voltage at the inputs measured withrespect to instrument ground should not exceed +/-120Vdc or acrms. For actively enhancedcommon mode rejection (i.e. operation within the spec.) this voltage should be limited to +/-40Vdc.Floating transducers will automatically be biased to +2.5V with respect to instrument groundupon connection.
Note: All the other I/Os are fully isolated from the instrument ground and eachother.
Safety and EMC Information 2704 Controller
B-4 Engineering Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 2.0 Apr-00
Figure B-1: Analogue Input and Fixed Digital I/O Equivalent Circuit
B.3.5. WiringIt is important to connect the controller in accordance with the wiring data given in thishandbook. Take particular care not to connect AC supplies to the low voltage sensor input orother low level inputs and outputs. Only use copper conductors for connections (exceptthermocouple inputs) and ensure that the wiring of installations comply with all local wiringregulations. For example in the in the UK use the latest version of the IEE wiringregulations, (BS7671). In the USA use NEC Class 1 wiring methods.
B.3.6. Power IsolationThe installation must include a power isolating switch or circuit breaker. This device shouldbe in close proximity to the controller, within easy reach of the operator and marked as thedisconnecting device for the instrument.
B.3.7. Earth leakage currentDue to RFI Filtering there is an earth leakage current of less than 0.5mA. This may affect thedesign of an installation of multiple controllers protected by Residual Current Device, (RCD)or Ground Fault Detector, (GFD) type circuit breakers.
AnalogueInput
220K
220K
2.5V
100R FuseResistor
2M* BleedResistor
N L
Screen ComInstrument Ground
Digital IO
Digital Input
ControlVoltage
CommonVoltage
+
-
2704 Controller Safety and EMC Information
Engineering Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 2.0 Apr-00 B-5
B.3.8. Overcurrent protectionTo protect the internal PCB tracking within the controller against excess currents, the ACpower supply to the controller and power outputs must be wired through the fuse or circuitbreaker specified in the technical specification.
B.3.9. Voltage ratingThe maximum continuous voltage applied between any of the following terminals must notexceed 264Vac:
• line or neutral to any other connection;
• relay or triac output to logic, dc or sensor connections;
• any connection to ground.
The controller should not be wired to a three phase supply with an unearthed star connection.Under fault conditions such a supply could rise above 264Vac with respect to ground and theproduct would not be safe.
Voltage transients across the power supply connections, and between the power supply andground, must not exceed 2.5kV. Where occasional voltage transients over 2.5kV areexpected or measured, the power installation to both the instrument supply and load circuitsshould include a transient limiting device.
These units will typically include gas discharge tubes and metal oxide varistors that limit andcontrol voltage transients on the supply line due to lightning strikes or inductive loadswitching. Devices are available in a range of energy ratings and should be selected to suitconditions at the installation.
B.3.10. Conductive pollutionElectrically conductive pollution must be excluded from the cabinet in which the controller ismounted. For example, carbon dust is a form of electrically conductive pollution. To secure asuitable atmosphere in conditions of conductive pollution, fit an air filter to the air intake ofthe cabinet. Where condensation is likely, for example at low temperatures, include athermostatically controlled heater in the cabinet.
Safety and EMC Information 2704 Controller
B-6 Engineering Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 2.0 Apr-00
B.3.11. Over-temperature protectionWhen designing any control system it is essential to consider what will happen if any part ofthe system should fail. In temperature control applications the primary danger is that theheating will remain constantly on. Apart from spoiling the product, this could damage anyprocess machinery being controlled, or even cause a fire.
Reasons why the heating might remain constantly on include:
• the temperature sensor becoming detached from the process;
• thermocouple wiring becoming short circuit;
• the controller failing with its heating output constantly on;
• an external valve or contactor sticking in the heating condition;
• the controller setpoint set too high.
Where damage or injury is possible, we recommend fitting a separate over-temperatureprotection unit, with an independent temperature sensor, which will isolate the heatingcircuit.
Please note that the alarm relays within the controller will not give protection under all failureconditions.
B.3.12. Grounding of the temperature sensor shieldIn some installations it is common practice to replace the temperature sensor while thecontroller is still powered up. Under these conditions, as additional protection againstelectric shock, we recommend that the shield of the temperature sensor is grounded. Do notrely on grounding through the framework of the machine.
B.4. INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS FOR EMC
To ensure compliance with the European EMC directive certain installation precautions arenecessary as follows:
• For general guidance refer to EMC Installation Guide, HA025464.
• When using relay or triac outputs it may be necessary to fit a filter suitable forsuppressing the emissions. The filter requirements will depend on the type of load. Fortypical applications we recommend Schaffner FN321 or FN612.
B.4.1. Routing of wiresTo minimise the pick-up of electrical noise, the wiring for low voltage dc and particularly thesensor input should be routed away from high-current power cables. Where it is impracticalto do this, use shielded cables with the shield grounded at both ends.
2704 Controller Technical Specification
Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 2.0 Apr-00 C-1
C. APPENDIX C TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION.................... 2C.1. ALL ANALOGUE, DUAL AND PV INPUTS..........................................2C.2. PRECISION PV INPUT / MODULE........................................................3C.3. DUAL (PROBE) INPUT MODULE..........................................................3C.4. ANALOGUE INPUT ..................................................................................4C.5. ANALOGUE INPUT MODULE................................................................4C.6. STANDARD DIGITAL I/O........................................................................5C.7. DIGITAL INPUT MODULES ...................................................................5C.8. DIGITAL OUTPUT MODULES...............................................................5C.9. ANALOGUE OUTPUT MODULES .........................................................5C.10. TRANSMITTER PSU...............................................................................5C.11. TRANSDUCER PSU.................................................................................6C.12. POTENTIOMETER INPUT....................................................................6C.13. DIGITAL COMMUNICATIONS............................................................6C.14. ALARMS ...................................................................................................6C.15. USER MESSAGES ...................................................................................6C.16. CONTROL FUNCTIONS ........................................................................6C.17. SETPOINT PROGRAMMER .................................................................7C.18. ADVANCED FUNCTIONS......................................................................7C.19. GENERAL SPECIFICATION.................................................................7C.20. GRAPHICAL REPRESENTATION OF ERRORS...............................8C.20.1. mV Input...................................................................................................8C.20.2. Mid range high impedance Input ..............................................................9C.20.3. High Level Input.....................................................................................10C.20.4. RTD (Pt-100) Input type .......................................................................11C.20.5. Thermocouple Input type........................................................................13
Technical Specification 2704 Controller
C-2 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 2.0 Apr-00
C. Appendix C Technical SpecificationAll figures quoted at 0 to 50oC unless otherwise stated.
C.1. ALL ANALOGUE, DUAL AND PV INPUTS
Sample rate 9Hz (110msec.)Input filtering OFF to 999.9 seconds of filter time constant (f.t.c.). Default setting is
0.4 seconds unless stated otherwiseUser calibration Both the user calibration and a transducer scaling can be applied.Sensor break a.c. sensor break on each input (i.e. fast responding and no dc errors
with high impedance sources).Thermocoupletypes
Most linearisations including K,J,T,R,B,S,N,L,PII,C,D,E withlinearisation error < ±0.2°C
General Resolution (noise free) is quoted as a typical figure with f.t.c. set to thedefault value = 0.4 second.Resolution generally improves by a factor of two with everyquadrupling of f.t.c.Calibration is quoted as offset error + percentage error of absolutereading at ambient temperature of 25OCDrift is quoted as extra offset and absolute reading errors per degree ofambient change from 25OC.
2704 Controller Technical Specification
Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 2.0 Apr-00 C-3
C.2. PRECISION PV INPUT / MODULE
Allocation(isolated)
One standard and up to two additional PV input modules can be fittedin I/O slots 3 and 6
mV input Two ranges: ±40mV & ±80mV, used for thermocouple, linear mVsource or 0 - 20mA with 2.49*Calibration: ±(1.5µV + 0.05% of reading), Resolution: 0.5µV for40mV range & 1µV for 80mV rangeDrift: <±(0.05µV + 0.003% of absolute reading) per °CInput impedance: >100M*, Leakage: < 1nA
0 - 2V input -1.4V to +2V, used for zirconiaCalibration: ±(0.5mV + 0.05% of reading)Resolution: 60µVDrift: < ±(0.05mV + 0.003% of reading) per °CInput impedance: >100M*, Leakage: < 1nA
0 - 10V input -3V to +10V, used for voltage inputCalibration: ±(0.5mV + 0.1% of reading)Resolution: 180µVDrift: <±(0.1mV + 0.01% of reading) per °CInput impedance: 0.66M*
Pt100 input 0 to 400ohms (-200°C to +850°C), 3 matched wires - up to 22* ineach lead without errors.Calibration: ±(0.1°C + 0.04% of reading in °C)Resolution: 0.02°CDrift: < ±(0.006°C + 0.002% of absolute reading in °C) per °CBulb current: 0.2mA.
Thermocouple Internal compensation: CJC rejection ratio >40:1 typical.CJ Temperature calibration error at 25OC: <± 0.5°C0°C, 45°C and 50°C external compensation available.
Zirconia probes Most probes supported. Continuous monitoring of probe impedance(100Ω to 100KΩ)
C.3. DUAL (PROBE) INPUT MODULE
General The same specification as for the Precision PV Input module applieswith the exception of the following:Module offers two sensor/transmitter inputs, which share the samenegative input terminal.One low level (mV, 0-20mA, thermocouple, Pt100) and one high level(0-2Vdc, 0-10Vdc) can be connected
Isolation The two inputs are isolated from the rest of the instrument but notfrom each other
Sample rate (eachinput)
4.5Hz (220msec)
Input filtering Default setting is 0.8 seconds
Technical Specification 2704 Controller
C-4 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 2.0 Apr-00
C.4. ANALOGUE INPUT
No of inputs One fixed (Not isolated)Can be used with either floating or ground referenced transducers oflow impedance.
Input range -10V to +10V linear or 0 -20 mA with burden resistor of 100*.Calibration: ±(1.5mV + 0.1% of reading)Resolution: 0.9mVDrift: < ±(0.1mV + 0.006% of reading) per °CInput Impedance: 0.46MΩ (floating input), 0.23MΩ (groundreferenced input)
Isolation Not isolated from standard digital I/O . Differential type input withcommon mode range of + 42Vdc (the average voltage of the twoinputs with respect to ‘Screen’ or ‘Common’ terminals should bewithin +42Vdc.CMRR : >110dB at 50/60Hz, >80dB at DC
Functions Process variable, remote setpoint, power limit, feedforward, etc.
C.5. ANALOGUE INPUT MODULE
Allocation Up to 4 analogue input modules can be fitted in I/O slots 1,3,4 & 6mV input 100mV range - used for thermocouple, linear mV source, or 0-20mA
with 2.49Ω external burden resistor.Calibration: + 10µV + 0.2% of readingResolution: 6µVDrift: < + 0.2µV + 0.004% of reading per OCInput impedance: >10MΩ, Leakage: <10nA
0 - 2Vdc input -0.2V to +2.0V range - used for zirconia.Calibration: + 2mV + 0.2% of readingResolution: 30µVDrift: < + 0.1mV + 0.004% of reading per OCInput impedance: >10MΩ, Leakage: <20nA
0 - 10Vdc input -3V to +10.0V range - used for voltage input.Calibration: + 2mV + 0.2% of readingResolution: 200µVDrift: < + 0.1mV + 0.02% of reading per OCInput impedance: >69KΩ
Pt100 input 0 to 400ohms (-200°C to +850°C), 3 matched wires - up to 22* ineach lead without errors.Calibration: ±(0.4°C + 0.15% of reading in °C)Resolution: 0.08°CDrift: < ±(0.015°C + 0.005% of reading in °C) per °CBulb current: 0.3mA.
Thermocouple Internal compensation: CJC rejection ratio >25:1 typical.CJ Temperature calibration error at 25OC: <± 2°C0°C, 45°C and 50°C external compensation available.
2704 Controller Technical Specification
Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 2.0 Apr-00 C-5
C.6. STANDARD DIGITAL I/O
Allocationnot isolated
1 digital input standard and 7 I/O which can be configured as inputs oroutputs plus 1 changeover relay
Digital inputs Voltage level : input active < 2Vdc, inactive >4VdcContact closure : input active <100ohms, inactive >28kohms
Digital outputs Open collector, 24Vdc at 40mA drive capability, requires externalsupply
Changeover relay Contact rating 2A at 264Vac resistiveFunctions Refer to Chapter 17Operations 1,000,000 operations with addition of external snubber
C.7. DIGITAL INPUT MODULES
Module type Triple contact input, Triple logic inputAllocation Can be fitted into slots 1, 3, 4, 5 or 6Contact closure Active <100ohms, inactive >28kohmsLogic inputs Current sinking : active 10.8Vdc to 30Vdc at 2.5mA
inactive -3 to 5Vdc at <-0.4mAFunctions Refer to Chapter 18
C.8. DIGITAL OUTPUT MODULES
Module types Single relay, dual relay, single triac, dual triac, triple logic module(isolated)
Allocation Can be fitted into slot 1, 3, 4, 5 or 6 (max. 3 triac modules perinstrument)
Relay rating 2A, 264Vac resistiveLogic drive 12Vdc at 8mATriac rating 0.75A, 264Vac resistiveFunctions Refer to Chapter 18
C.9. ANALOGUE OUTPUT MODULES
Module types 1 channel DC control, 1 channel DC retransmission (5 max.)Allocation(isolated)
Can be fitted into slot 1, 3, 4, 5 or 6
Range 0-20mA, 0-10VdcResolution 1 part in 10,000 (2,000-noise free) 0.5% accurate for retransmission
1 part in 10,000 2.5% accurate for controlFunctions Refer to Chapter 18
C.10. TRANSMITTER PSU
Allocation Can be fitted into slots 1, 3 ,4 ,5 or 6 (isolated)Transmitter 24Vdc at 20mA
Technical Specification 2704 Controller
C-6 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 2.0 Apr-00
C.11. TRANSDUCER PSU
Bridge voltage Software selectable 5 or 10VdcBridge resistance 300Ω to 15KΩInternal shuntresistor
30.1KΩ at 0.25%, used for calibration of 350Ω bridge
C.12. POTENTIOMETER INPUT
Potentiometerresistance
330Ω to 15KΩ, excitation of 0.5 volts
C.13. DIGITAL COMMUNICATIONS
Allocation 2 modules fitted in slots H & J (isolated)Modbus RS232, 2 wire or 4 wire RS485, max baud 19.2KB in H module &
9.6KB in J moduleProfibus-DP High speed, RS485, 1.5Mbaud
C.14. ALARMS
No of Alarms Input alarms (2), loop alarms (2) User alarms (8)Alarm types Full scale, deviation, rate of change, sensor break plus application
specificModes Latching or non-latching, blocking, time delayParameters Refer to Chapter 7
C.15. USER MESSAGES
No of messages Maximum 50, triggered by operator or alarm or used for customparameter names
Format Up to 16 characters
C.16. CONTROL FUNCTIONS
No of loops One, two or threeModes On/off, PID, motorised valve with or without feedbackOptions Cascade, ratio, override or feed forwardCooling algorithms Linear, water, oil or fanPID sets 3 per loop (Cascade loop includes master and slave parameters)Manual mode Bumpless transfer or forced manual output, manual tracking availableSetpoint rate limit Display units per second, minute or hour
2704 Controller Technical Specification
Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 2.0 Apr-00 C-7
C.17. SETPOINT PROGRAMMER
No of programs A maximum of 50 programs assignable over 500 segments for a timeto target programmer and 400 segments for a ramp rate programmer.A program can consist of up to 3 variables. Programs can be givenuser defined 16 character names
Event outputs Up to 16, can be assigned individually to segments or called as part ofan event group
C.18. ADVANCED FUNCTIONS
Application blocks 32 digital operations24 Analogue calculations
Timers 4, On Pulse, Off delay, one shot and min-OnTotalisers 4, trigger level & reset inputReal time clock Day of week and timePattern generators 16 x 16, 2 off
C.19. GENERAL SPECIFICATION
Display range 5 digits including up to 3 decimal placesSupply 85-264Vac, 20Watts (max)Operating ambient 0 - 50°C and 5 to 95% RH non condensingStorage temp -10 to +70°CPanel sealing IP54Dimensions 96H x 96W x 150D (mm)EMC standards EN50081-1 & EN50082-2 generic standards - suitable for domestic,
commercial and light industrial as well as heavy industrialenvironments
Safety standards Meets EN61010 installation category II, pollution degree 2Atmospheres Not suitable for use above 2000m or in explosive or corrosive
atmospheres
Technical Specification 2704 Controller
C-8 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 2.0 Apr-00
C.20. GRAPHICAL REPRESENTATION OF ERRORS
This section shows graphically the effects of adding all contributions of different errors foreach input type and range. The errors are a combination of:Calibration accuracy, Drift with ambient temperature, Linearity error, Leakage
C.20.1. mV InputTwo ranges:working range +40mVfull linear range +60mVnoise (resolution) 1uV - OFF, 0.5uV - 0.4sec, 0.25uV - 1.6sec
working range +80mVfull linear range +105mVnoise (resolution) 2uV - OFF, 1uV - 0.4sec, 0.5uV - 1.6sec
Calibration accuracy @ 25OC< + (1.5uV + 0.05% of |reading|)
Drift with ambient temperature< +(0.05uV + 0.003% of |reading|) per oC
Linearity error< +0.002% of span (i.e. <1uV, <2uV)
Leakage< +1nA (typically +200pA)
Figure C-1: Error Graph - mV Input
| Error | [uV]
Input[mV]
+40-40 +80-80
+ 105 mV
+ 60 mV
20
40
80
3
Maximumerror at 25oC
Worst case
Typicalcase.
Max. errorat 0 - 50 oC
2704 Controller Technical Specification
Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 2.0 Apr-00 C-9
C.20.2. Mid range high impedance Input0 - 2V Input type
Range:working range -1.4V to +2Vfull linear range -1.8V to +2.4Vnoise (resolution) 100uV - OFF, 50uV - 0.4sec, 35uV - 1.6sec
Calibration accuracy @ 25OC< + (0.5mV + 0.05% of |reading|)
Drift with ambient temperature< +(0.05mV + 0.003% of |reading|) per oC
Linearity error< + 0.01% of span (i.e. + 200uV)
Input Impedance & Leakage
>100MΩ < 1nA
Figure C-2: Error Graph - 0 - 2V Input
Worst case
Typicalcase.
Max. errorsat 0 - 50oC
| Error | [mV]
Input[V]
+1-1.4 +2-1.8
Maximum error at 25oC
1
2
3
0.5
4
Technical Specification 2704 Controller
C-10 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 2.0 Apr-00
C.20.3. High Level Input0 - 10V Input type
Range:working range -3V to +10V
full linear range - 5V to +14Vnoise (resolution) 300uV - OFF, 150uV - 0.4sec, 100uV - 1.6sec
Calibration accuracy @ 25OC< + (0.5mV + 0.1% of |reading|)
Drift with ambient temperature< +(0.01mV + 0.006% of |reading|) per oC
Linearity error< +0.02% of span (i.e. + 2mV)
Input Impedance0.66 M*
Figure C-3: Error Graph - 0 - 10V Input
| Error | [mV]
Input[V]
+5-3 +10-5
Maximum error at
Worstcase
Typicalcase
Max. errorsat 0 - 50 oC
10
20
30
5
+12
40
2704 Controller Technical Specification
Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 2.0 Apr-00 C-11
C.20.4. RTD (Pt-100) Input type
Resistance measurement specification in Ohms:Range
0 to 400 Ω with up to 22 Ω in each connecting lead
Noise (resolution)
80 mΩ - 0.4sec, 40mΩ - 1.6sec
Calibration accuracy limits @ 25OC< + (35mΩ @110Ω + 0.03% of |reading - 110Ω |)
Drift with ambient temperature+ (0.002% of |reading|) per oC
Linearity error
< +15 mΩ
Pt-100 measurement specification in oC:Range
-200 oC to +850 oC
Noise (resolution)0.02 oC - 0.4sec, 0.01 oC - 1.6sec
Calibration accuracy limit @ 25OC< + (0.1 oC + 0.03% of |reading in oC |)
Drift with ambient temperature< +(0.0055 oC + 0.002% of |reading in oC |) per oC of ambient change
Linearity + Linearisation error< + 55 omC (i.e. 50 omC + 5 omC )
Technical Specification 2704 Controller
C-12 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 2.0 Apr-00
Figure C-4: Error Graph - RTD Input
Input[oC]
| Error | [oC]
400200 600-200
The actualmaximum error atambient 25oC
0.1
0.2
0.3
800
0.4
0
Specified limitof max. error atambient 25 oC
0.5
0.6
0.7 Specified limitof max. errorsat 0 to 50oC
The actual andtypical errorsat 0 to 50oC
2704 Controller Technical Specification
Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 2.0 Apr-00 C-13
C.20.5. Thermocouple Input type
Internal CJT sensing specCalibration error @ 25 oC (including temp. difference between top and bottom screws)
< + 0.5 oC
Total CJT error< + (0.5 oC + 0.012 oC per 1 oC of ambient change)
( i.e. CJC Rejection for measured temperatures above 0 oC is > 80 : 1 )
Noise (resolution)0.01 oC
Figure C-5: Overall CJT Error at Different Ambient Temperatures
Ambient Temperature
| CJT Error |
0 25 50 75
1
Technical Specification 2704 Controller
C-14 Installation and Operation Handbook. Part No HA026502 Issue 2.0 Apr-00
Rua Alfredo Pujol, 1010 - Santana - São Paulo - SP.
SOLITON CONTROLES INDUSTRIAIS LTDA
Tel:11 - 6950-1834 / Fax: 11 - 6979-8980 - e-mail: [email protected]
www.soliton.com.br - e-mail: [email protected]ções sobre programação